Home

Edge-Core ES4524M-PoE EU

Contents

1. Web console and passwords You can Tenet manually configure access ZEREA rights on the switch or you 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch tact thenticati A can use a remote access RADIUS 3 Authentication server challenges client authentication server based TACACS 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access on RADIUS or TACACS server 6 Switch grants management access protocols m Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server 3 55 Configuring the Switch contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the
2. Command Function Mode Page protocol vian protocol group Create a protocol group specifying the supported protocols GC 4 209 protocol vian protocol group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN GC 4 209 vlan show protocol vian Shows the configuration of protocol groups PE 4 210 protocol group show protocol vian Shows the VLANs assigned to a protocol group PE 4 211 protocol group vid To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 4 195 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group vlan command 4 208 VLAN Commands 4 protocol vian protocol group This command creates a protocol group or to add specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id add remove frame type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc 1042 Ilc other protocol Protocol type The only option for the Ilc othe
3. ojoj OM a BR win CLI This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port and then enables immediate leave on the receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if mvr type source Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr type receiver Console config if mvr immediate Console config if Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces Command Usage e Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically assigned to it under the MVR Configuration menu see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 3 212 The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x 21 Port Information only 3 217 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes e Interface Indicates a port or trunk Member Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been statically assigned to the selected interface Non Member Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have not been statically assigned to the selected interface Web Click MVR Group Member Configuration Select a port or trunk fr
4. Command Function Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 166 clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4 167 dynamic show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 167 mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 168 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 169 aging time mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan vian id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vian id mac address MAC address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration 4 166 Address Table Commands 4 Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following
5. 3 111 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 8 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG ports 5 8 are set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 4 150 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 4 151 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 153 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 8 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console tshow lacp sysid 4 154 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 2 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 3 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 4 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 5 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 6 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 7 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC 8 32768 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC Console show lacp 1 internal 4 154 Port Channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 3 112 Port Configuration Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 3 4 LACP Port Counters Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received
6. You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 77 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the ES4524M PoE is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Entering Commands 4 Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the ES4524M PoE is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Password privileged level password Console Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify swit
7. Related Commands permit deny 4 124 ip access group 4 127 show ip access list 4 127 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 4 123 4 124 Access Control List Commands 4 permit
8. 1 Introduction Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled SNMP V3 View defaultview Group public read only private read write Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled RSTP Protocol Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Enabled Switchport Mode Egress Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled System Defaults 1 Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0 Weighted Round Robin Queue 0 12 3 Weight 1 2 4 8 IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Setting
9. Command Group Function Page User Accounts Configures the basic user names and passwords for management 4 75 access Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4 78 RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4 80 TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS server 4 83 Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4 85 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 88 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 89 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1X 4 98 Management IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 4 107 User Account Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 29 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 75 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 98 Table 4 27 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication system at GC 4 76 login enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec GC 4 77 level 4 75 4 Command Line Interface username This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s
10. Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 94 show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 4 36 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started 4 96 Authentication Commands 4 Table 4 36 show ssh display description Continued Field Description Username The user name of the client Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac sha1 aes192 cbc hmac sha1 aes256 cbc hmac sha1 3des cbc hmac sha1 blowfish cbc hmac sha1 aes128 cbc hmac m
11. _ There can be more than one user defined configuration file saved in the switch s flash memory but only one is designated as the startup file that is loaded when the switch boots The copy running config startup config command always sets the new file as the startup file To select a previously saved configuration file use the boot system config lt ilename gt command The maximum number of saved configuration files depends on available flash memory with each configuration file normally requiring less than 20 kbytes The amount of available flash memory can be checked by using the dir command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config 4 24 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 2 9 2 Initial Configuration Configuring Power over Ethernet The switch s 24 10 100 1000 Mbps ports support the IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE standard that enables DC power to be supplied to attached devices over the wire pairs in the connecting Ethernet cable Any 802 3af compliant device attached to a port can directly draw power from the switch over the Ethernet cable without requiring its own
12. Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 142 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 4 152 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed i e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4 151 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch e Port Port number Range 1 24 e System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems e Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 1 Note Use t
13. Primary VLAN Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs Community VLAN A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports e Trunk The trunk identifier Port Information only Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Port Information or Trunk Information Private VLAN Port Information Port PVLAN Port Type Primary VLAN Community VLAN Isolated VLAN Trunk 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Promiscuous 5 4 Host 6 5 Host 6 6 7 8 Normal Normal Normal zj Figure 3 86 Private VLAN Port Information CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and community VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as host ports and associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console show vlan private vlan 4 207 Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Ethl 3 5 6 community Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Console 3 172 VLAN Configuration Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk Configuration menus to set the private VLAN interface type and assign the interfaces to a private VLAN Command Attributes Port Trunk The switch interface PVLAN Port Type Sets pri
14. Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Admin Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Range 0 for auto configuration 1 65535 for the short path cost method 4 1 200 000 000 for the long path cost method By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Table 3 1 Recommended STA Path Cost Range Port Type IEEE
15. The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters e Notify View The configured view for notifications Range 1 64 characters Table 3 1 Supported Notification Messages Object Label Object ID Description RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election topologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Discarding state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition SNMPv2 Traps coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered 3 49 Configuring the Switch Table 3 1 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 AlinkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent
16. show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show spanning tree mst configuration MSTP Configuration Information Configuration Name R amp D Revision Level 0 Instance VLANs 0 2 4094 1 a Console VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 1 VLAN Commands Command Groups Function Page GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning 4 190 shows the configuration for bridge extension MIB Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and state 4 194 Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including ingress and egress 4 196 Interfaces tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and MAC addresses 4 202 Information Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 4 203 Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 4 208 4 189 4 Command Line Interfac
17. 4 108 Client Security Commands 4 Client Security Commands This switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to each of the data ports and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to the network Private VLANs and port based authentication using IEEE 802 1X are commonly used for these purposes In addition to these methods several other options of providing client security are described in this section These include port based authentication which can be configured to allow network client access by specifying a fixed set of MAC addresses The addresses assigned to DHCP clients can also be carefully controlled using static or dynamic bindings with the IP Source Guard and DHCP Snooping commands Table 4 1 Client Security Commands Command Group Function Page Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 4 203 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1X 4 98 Access Control Lists Provides filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP 4 122 UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type IP Source Guard Filters IP traffic on unsecure ports for which the source address 4 111 cannot be identified via DHCP snooping nor static source bindings DHCP Snooping Filters untrusted DHCP messages on unsecure ports by building 4 115 and maintaining a DHCP
18. A valid unicast MAC address IP Address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C Web Click IP Source Guard Static Configuration select the VLAN and port to which the entry will be bound enter the MAC address and associated IP address then click Add Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Static Binding Table gt Counts VLAN 1 00 12 34 56 78 9A Unit 1 Port 9 192 168 1 35 IPv4 Lease Time 0 Seconds Current Static Binding Table Port 1 VLAN ID 1 wl MAC Address IP Address Figure 3 52 Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration 3 97 Configuring the Switch CLI This example configures a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 Console config 4 114 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Use the Dynamic Information page to display the source guard binding table for a selected interface Command Attributes Query by Select an interface to display the source guard binding Options Port VLAN MAC Address or IP Address e Dynamic Binding Table Counts Displays the number of IP addresses in the source guard binding table e Current Dynamic Binding Table Displays the IP addresses in the source guard binding table Web Click IP Source Guard Dynamic Information Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding
19. Autonegotiation Media Type Member Port Name Type 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif Figure 3 54 Port Status Information Field Attributes CLI Basic Information e Port type Indicates the port type 1000T or 1000Base SFP MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 15 Configuration e Name Interface label e Port Admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast Storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled 3 100 Port Configuration Broadcast Storm Limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 64 1 000 000 kilobits per second Multicast Storm Shows if multicast storm control is
20. Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx default Console config dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotix max req count no dot1x max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 99 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx max req 2 Console config if dot1x port control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control e auto Requires a dot1x aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dot x aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x port control auto Console config if dot1x operation mode This command allows sin
21. Default Disabled MVR Running Status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied e MVR VLAN Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming multicast services using MVR Range 1 4094 Default 1 e MVR Group IP IP address for an MVR multicast group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN e Count Number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 Default 0 3 212 Multicast VLAN Registration Web Click MVR Configuration Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts and then click Apply MVR Configuration MYR Status Enabled MYR Running Status False MVR VLAN lt MVR Group IP List Current New MVR Group IP 228 1 23 1 Count 10 none Figure 3 107 MVR Global Configuration CLI This example first enables IGMP snooping enables MVR globally and then configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config ip igmp snooping 4 253 Console config mvr 4 262 Console config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 4 262 Console config 3 213 Configuring the Switch Displaying MVR Interface Status You can
22. ID 1 00 12 CF 23 49 C0 MAC Addi Figure 3 113 Cluster Member Configuration CLI This example creates a new cluster Member by specifying the Candidate switch MAC address and setting a Member ID Console config cluster member mac address 00 12 34 56 78 9a id 5 4 56 Console config 3 221 Configuring the Switch Cluster Member Information Displays current cluster Member switch information Command Attributes Member ID The ID number of the Member switch Range 1 36 e Role Indicates the current status of the switch in the cluster e IP Address The internal cluster IP address assigned to the Member switch MAC Address The MAC address of the Member switch e Description The system description string of the Member switch Web Click Cluster Member Information Cluster Member Information Member ID Role IP Address MAC Address Description 1 Active Member 10 254 254 2 O0 12 CF 23 49 CO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Figure 3 114 Cluster Member Information CLI This example shows information about cluster Member switches Console show cluster members 4 57 Cluster Members ID 1 Role Active member IP Address 10 254 254 2 MAC Address 00 12 cf 23 49 c0 Description 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Console 3 222 Switch Clustering Cluster Candidate Information Displays information about discovered switches in the network that
23. Maximum Age 6 40 fo seconds Forward Delay 4 30 fis seconds RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long z Transmission Limit 1 10 B MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers Configuration Digest 0xAC36177F50283CD4B8382 1D8AB26DE62 Region Revision 0 65535 fo Figure 3 74 STA Global Configuration 3 144 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 4 170 Console config spanning tree mode mstp 4 171 Console config spanning tree priority 40960 4 174 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 4 173 Console config spanning tree max age 28 4 173 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 4 172 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 4 175 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 4 175 Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 176 Console config mstp revision 1 4 178 Console config mstp name R amp D 4 178 Console config mstp max hops 30 4 179 Console config mstp Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays current state of
24. This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 e 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect Use this command to terminate an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier O will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 96 show users 4 20 4 37 4 Command Line Interface show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console Configuration Password Threshold 3 times Interactive Timeout 600 sec Login Timeout Disabled Silent Time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 P
25. e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 1 Multicast IP Address 2241 1 12 Multicast Group Port List Uniti Portl User Figure 3 105 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 256 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type T 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER i 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console 3 209 Configuring the Switch Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 204 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the m
26. 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Dynamic Console Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration MVR A single network wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic such as television channels across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers This can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN Also note that MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Table 3 12 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands Command Function Mode Page mvr Globally enables MVR statically configures MVR group address es or GC 4 262 specifies the MVR VLAN identifier mvr Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port or IC 4 263 configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN mvr immediate Enables immediate leave capability IC 4 264 show mvr Shows information about the global MVR configuration settings the PE 4 265 interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN 4 261 4 Command Line Interface Table 3 12 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page show mvr Shows
27. Console config class map rd_class match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap Related Commands show class map 4 250 4 244 Quality of Service Commands 4 match This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic Use the no form to delete the matching criteria Syntax no match access list ac name ip dscp dscp ip precedence jp precedence vlan vlan acl name Name of the access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters dscp A DSCP value Range 0 63 jjp precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e vlan A VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Class Map Configuration Command Usage First enter the class map command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command to specify the fields within ingress packets that must match to qualify for this class map Up to 16 match commands are permitted per class map Example This example creates a class map called rd_class 1 and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class 1_ match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap This example creates a class map call rd_class 2 and sets it to match packets marked for IP Precedence service value 5 Console config cla
28. Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 123 4 126 Access Control List Commands 4 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL e acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 124
29. Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and only allow you to display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts At the Username prompt enter admin 3 Atthe Password prompt press lt Enter gt since there is no default password The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level 2 3 2 Initial Configuration Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privil
30. Powered by Accton ES4524M PoE 24 Port Layer 2 4 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Management Guide with PoE Management Guide ES4524M PoE Gigabit Ethernet Switch with PoE Layer 2 4 Switch with 22 10 100 1000BASE T RJ 45 Ports and 2 Gigabit Combination Ports RJ 45 SFP ES4524M PoE F1 0 0 5 E012008 ST RO01 149100037400A Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Key Features 1 1 Description of Software Features 1 2 System Defaults 1 5 Chapter 2 Initial Configuration 2 1 Connecting to the Switch 2 1 Configuration Options 2 1 Required Connections 2 2 Remote Connections 2 3 Basic Configuration 2 3 Console Connection 2 3 Setting Passwords 2 4 Setting an IP Address 2 4 Manual Configuration 2 4 Dynamic Configuration 2 5 Enabling SNMP Management Access 2 6 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients 2 6 Trap Receivers 2 7 Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2 8 Managing System Files 2 8 Saving Configuration Settings 2 9 Configuring Power over Ethernet 2 10 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch 3 1 Using the Web Interface 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 2 Home Page 3 2 Configuration Options 3 3 Panel Display 3 3 Main Menu 3 4 Basic Configuration 3 11 Displaying System Information 3 11 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 13 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 14 Setting the Switch s IP Address 3 15 Manual Configuration 3 16 Using DHCP BOOTP 3 17 Contents Enab
31. Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max Hops 20 Remaining Hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC Current Root Port 0 Current Root Cost 0 Number of Topology Changes 0 Last Topology Change Time sec 246 Transmission Limit 3 Path Cost Method Long 3 154 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Spanning Tree Status Admin Status Enabled Role Designate State Forwarding External Admin Path Cost 0 Internal Admin Path Cost 0 External Oper Path Cost 100000 Internal Oper Path Cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated Cost 0 Designated Port 128 Designated Root 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC Designated Bridge 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC Fast Forwarding Enabled Forward Transitions 1 Admin Edge Port Enabled Oper Edge Port Enabled Admin Link Type Auto Oper Link Type Point to point Enabled Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 145 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay paramet
32. Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None 4 26 System Management Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 27 delete public key 4 94 dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file
33. The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private VLANs configured on the switch including primary and community VLANs and their assigned interfaces Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 and VLAN type e Primary VLAN The VLAN with which the selected VLAN ID is associated A primary VLAN displays its own ID and a community VLAN displays the associated primary VLAN e Ports List The list of ports and assigned port type in the selected private VLAN Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Information Select the desired port from the VLAN ID drop down menu Private VLAN Information VLAN ID 5 Primary VLAN bd Primary VLAN VLAN 5 Ports List Unit 1 Port 3 Promiscuous Unit 1 Port 4 Host Unit 1 Port 5 Host Figure 3 83 Private VLAN Information 3 169 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console show vlan private vlan 4 207 Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Eth1 3 5 6 community Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Console Configuring Private VLANs The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create remove primary or community VLANs Command Attr
34. creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below e STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs e RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode te
35. display description Description LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Port Number Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol Port Number partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 4 156 Mirror Port Commands 4 Console show lacp 1 sysid Channel group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 5 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 6 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 7 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 8 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 9 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 10 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 11 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 12 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 Table 4 8 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel gro
36. 1 2147483647 Remove IVLAN ID 1 4094 Figure 3 89 Protocol VLAN System Configuration 3 175 Configuring the Switch Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology Setting LLDP Timing Attributes Use the LLDP Configuration screen to set attributes for general functions such as globally enabling LLDP on the switch setting the message ageout time and setting the frequency for broadcasting general advertisements or reports about changes in the LLD
37. 3 118 3 120 3 121 3 121 3 122 3 127 3 127 3 129 3 129 3 130 3 132 3 132 3 133 3 135 3 136 3 138 3 141 3 145 3 148 3 151 3 154 Contents Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP VLAN Configuration Overview Assigning Ports to VLANs Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting Displaying Basic VLAN Information Displaying Current VLANs Creating VLANs Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces Configuring Private VLANs Displaying Current Private VLANs Configuring Private VLANs Associating Private VLANs Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces Configuring Protocol VLANs Configuring Basic Protocol VLAN Settings Configuring the Protocol VLAN System Link Layer Discovery Protocol Setting LLDP Timing Attributes Configuring LLDP Interface Attributes Displaying LLDP Local Device Information Displaying LLDP Remote Port Information Displaying LLDP Remote Information Details Displaying Device Statistics Displaying Detailed Device Statistics Class of Service Configuration Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Selecting the Queue Mode Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values Selecting IP DSCP Priority Mapping DSCP Priority Quality
38. Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination Bit Mask Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4095 VID Bit Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4095 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Ethernet Type Bit Mask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets 3 86 Client Security Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VI
39. The TFTP server IP address location for the public key pair e Source File Name The file name used for the public key pair e Copy Public Key Save a copy of the public key pair e Delete This button deletes the user public key process 3 65 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security SSH User Public Key Settings Select the user type and public key type from the drop down box enter the TFTP server IP address input the source file name and then click Copy Public Key SSH User Public Key Settings Public Key of steve 1024 37 14384668491670936839233730320121675001836407 1634 1019379638480555999 1120799099855 1483482178019 98131852589 13277 124318157 123167424 79037926527315 176459964452007 1886758093289233531312680 1093139027656 2168769045 16683400280 1644806222735312064 108007531932299 10008880429355633 13486685828525296753736329526 4191089500393 rsa key 20061102 User Name Public Key Type TFTP Server IP Address Source File Name Figure 3 33 SSH User Public Key Settings 3 66 User Authentication CLI This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication through SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console tcopy tftp public key 4 24 TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username ste
40. You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority e The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames Th
41. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 143 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 141 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 3 151 Configuring the Switch To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings Command Attributes MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4094 The other global attributes are des
42. and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Protocol STP A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACAC
43. before re transmitting EAP packet page 4 103 supplicant timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts max req Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 4 99 Status Authorization status authorized or not Operation Mode Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1 X authorized port 4 104 Authentication Commands 4 Max Count The maximum number of hosts allowed to access this port page 4 100 Port control Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 4 100 Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Current Identifier The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier
44. deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny protocol number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precoder oso dscp dscp source port sport bitnfask destination port dport port bitmask no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence ftes tes dscp dscp source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask control flag control flags flag bitmask protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 e source Source IP address e destination Destination IP address e address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 a fes Tyse ol Somcelovel ange b 45 e dscp DSCP priority level Range 0 63 e sport Protocol 4 source port number Range 0 65535 dport Protocol destination port number Range 0 65535 e port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Dec
45. do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 38 show users 4 20 login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration 4 30 System Management Commands 4 Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication
46. i e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes SNMP Agent Status Enables SNMP on the switch Web Click SNMP Agent Status Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled checkbox and click Apply SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status IV Enabled Figure 3 21 Enabling the SNMP Agent CLI The following example enables SNMP on the switch Console config snmp server Console config 4 61 3 38 Simple Network Management Protocol Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability The switch supports up to five community strings e Current Displays a list of the community strings currently configured Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol e Default strings public read only access private read write access e Range 1 32 characters case sensitive e Access Mode Specifies the access rights for the community string Read Only Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP
47. interface ethernet 1 3 4 135 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 200 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 Console config if Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For 3 166 VLAN Configuration all other VLANs the PVID must be defined first then the status of the VLAN can be configured as a tagged or untagged member Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged
48. opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e File information is shown below Table 4 11 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes 4 27 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir File name File type Startup Size byte Unitl diag bix Boot Rom Image Y 1286876 es4524m poe_fw1005 bix Operation Code Y 3489580 Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File N 455 startupl cfg Config File Y 4085 Total free space 2359296 Console whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot File name File type Startup Size byte gt align Unit1 diag bix Boot Rom Image Y 1286876 es4524m
49. permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 IP access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any Console 4 132 Access Control List Commands 4 show access group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console 4 133 4 Command Line Interface 4 134 Interface Commands 4 Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 2 Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC 4 135 mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration 0 4 136 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC 4 136 when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface C 4 137 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in C 4 138 autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface 0 4 139 media typ
50. s hardware address in the DHCP packet the packet is dropped Example This example enables MAC address verification Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 115 ip dhcp snooping vian 4 117 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 118 4 119 4 Command Line Interface ip dhcp snooping information option This command enables the DHCP Option 82 information relay for the switch Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp snooping information option Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use this information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients e When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled the requesting client or an intermediate relay agent that has used the information fields to describe itself can be identified in the DHCP request packets forwarded by the switch and in reply packets sent back from the DHCP server by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address DHCP client server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN e DHCP snooping must be enabled on the s
51. the default is enabled then set the switch as a Cluster Commander Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with any other IP subnets in the network Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander e Switch clusters are limited to a single IP subnet Layer 2 domain e A switch can only be a Member of one cluster e Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network changes Example Console config cluster Console config cluster commander This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander Use the no form to disable the switch as cluster Commander Syntax no cluster commander Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 54 System Management Commands 4 Command Usage Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled switches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station e Cluster Member switches can be managed only through a Telnet connection to the Commander From the Commander CLI prompt use the recommand id command to connect to the Member switch Example Console config cluster commander Console config cluster ip pool This command sets the cluster IP address pool Use
52. timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a login attempt LC 4 32 response exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC 4 33 input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of LC 4 33 failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible LC 4 34 after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and LC 4 35 generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 35 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 36 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4 37 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 37 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE PE 4 38 4 29 4 Command Line Interface line This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as VTY in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits
53. 0 23 e min Minute Range 0 59 sec Second Range 0 59 e day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2101 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Note that when SNTP is enabled the system clock cannot be manually configured Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2002 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2002 Console 4 52 System Management Commands 4 show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar 15 12 34 February 1 2002 Console Switch Cluster Commands Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized management through a single unit Switches that support clustering can be grouped together regardless of physical location or switch type as long as they are connected to the same local network Table 4 19 Switch Cluster Commands Command Function Mode Page cluster Configures clustering on the switch GC 4 54 cluster commander Configures the switch as a cluster Commander GC 4 54 cluster ip pool Sets the cluster IP address pool for Members GC 4 55 cluster member Sets Candidate switches as cluster memb
54. 0 0016B6F03BEC 128 2 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016B6FO3BEC 128 3 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC 128 4 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC 128 5 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 001686F03BEC 128 6 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC 128 7 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016566F038BEC 128 8 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC 128 9 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC 128 10 2000000 Shared Enabled Orsabled z Figure 3 75 Displaying STA Port Status Information 3 147 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree Eth 1 5 Information Admin Status Role State External Admin Path Cost Internal Admin Path Cost External Oper Path Cost Internal Oper Path Cost Priority Designated Cost Designated Port Designated Root Designated Bridge Fast Forwarding Forward Transitions Admin Edge Port Oper Edge Port Admin Link Type Oper Link Type Spanning Tree Status Console ethernet 1 5 4 187 Enabled Disabled Discarding 0 0 2000000 2000000 128 0 128 5 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC 32768 0 00
55. 123 4 125 MAC 3 81 4 128 Standard IP 3 81 3 82 4 123 4 124 address table 3 132 4 166 aging time 3 135 4 169 B BOOTP 3 17 4 58 4 59 4 268 BPDU 3 136 broadcast storm threshold 3 118 4 141 Cc Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 4 client security 3 78 command line interface See CLI community string 2 6 3 39 4 62 configuration files restoring defaults 4 23 configuration settings restoring 4 23 saving 4 23 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 9 3 23 4 24 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 3 186 3 194 4 234 4 243 DSCP 3 192 4 240 layer 3 4 priorities 3 192 4 240 queue mapping 3 188 4 237 queue mode 3 190 4 234 traffic class weights 3 191 4 236 D default gateway configuration 3 16 4 269 default priority ingress port 3 186 4 235 default settings system 1 5 DHCP 3 17 4 58 4 59 4 268 client 3 16 dynamic configuration 2 5 DHCP snooping global configuration 3 90 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP DiffServ 4 243 binding policy to interface 4 249 class map 4 244 4 246 policy map 4 246 service policy 4 249 downloading software 3 21 4 24 DSCP enabling 3 192 4 240 mapping priorities 3 192 4 241 dynamic addresses displaying 3 133 4 167 E edge port STA 3 147 3 150 4 182 event logging 4 39 F firmware displaying version 3 13 4 21 upgrading 3 21 4 24 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway def
56. 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 4 124 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain either all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any e Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 82 3 83 Configuring the Switch e Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15 DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 64 e Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP e Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 e Sou
57. 2c z Remove Trap Security Level Timeout 0 2147483647 1 100 secs I Trap Inform Retry times 0 255 Enable Authentication Traps Vv Enable Link up and Link down Traps I Figure 3 23 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps Console config Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 inform private version 2c udp port 160 Console config snmp server enable traps authentication 3 42 E Simple Network Management Protocol Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID it must be changed first before configuring other parameters 2 Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Setting the Local Engine ID An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated
58. 3 hosts Default traps are used Timeout The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds Retry times The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 Enable Authentication Traps Issues a notification message to specified IP trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a notification message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled 3 These are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notification View page 3 49 3 41 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP Configuration Enter the IP address and community string for each management station that will receive trap messages specify the UDP port trap version trap security level for v3 clients trap inform settings for v2c v3 clients and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New Trap Manager IP Address 10 1 19 23 Trap Manager Community String private none p ho 8 87F za Trap UDP Port 160 Trap Version
59. 4 178 revision 4 178 max hops 4 179 mst vian This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst instance_id vlan vian range instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 vian range Range of VLANs Range 1 4093 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance 4 176 Spanning Tree Commands 4 By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 178 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp m
60. 4 271 show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 269 4 271 4 Command Line Interface ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host count couni size size host IP address of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 e size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the router adds header information Default Setting count 5 size 32 Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached The following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte
61. 49 c0 Description SMC8124PL2 Console show cluster candidates This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 57 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show cluster candidates Cluster Candidates Role Mac Description ACTIVE MEMBER 00 12 cf 23 49 c0O SMC8124PL2 CANDIDATE 00 12 cf 0b 47 a0 SMC8124PL2 Console UPnP Commands Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a set of protocols that allows devices to connect seamlessly and simplifies the deployment of home and office networks UPnP achieves this by issuing UPnP device control protocols designed upon open Internet based communication standards The commands described in this section allow the switch to advertise itself as a UPnP compliant device When discovered by a host device basic information about this switch can be displayed and the web management interface accessed Table 4 20 UPnP Commands Command Function Mode Page upnp device Enables UPnP on the network GC 4 58 upnp device ttl Sets the time to live TTL value GC 4 59 upnp device advertise Sets the advertisement duration of the device GC 4 59 duration show upnp Displays UPnP status and parameters PE 4 60 upnp device This command enables UPnP on the device Use the no form to disable UPnP Syntax no upnp device Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config upn
62. 6 Console config if 3 104 Port Configuration Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to 8 trunks at a time The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to
63. 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 3 10 2 000 200 000 Table 3 2 Recommended STA Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet Half Duplex 100 2 000 000 Full Duplex 95 1 999 999 Trunk 90 1 000 000 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 4 10 000 Trunk 3 5 000 14 Refer to Configuring Global Settings on page 3 141 for information on setting the path cost method 3 149 Configuring the Switch Table 3 3 Default STA Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 gt 5000 as tested Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause fo
64. 95 Port Configuration Enables IP source guard and selects filter type per port 3 95 Static Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source guard binding table 3 96 Dynamic Information Displays the source guard binding table for a selected 3 98 interface Cluster 3 219 Configuration Globally enables clustering for the switch 3 219 Member Configuration Adds switch Members to the cluster 3 221 Member Information Displays cluster Member switch information 3 222 Candidate Information Displays network Candidate switch information 3 223 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page UPNP Universal Plug and Play 3 224 Configuration Configures basic UPnP parameters 3 225 Basic Configuration Basic Configuration This section describes the basic functions required to set up management access to the switch display or upgrade operating software or reset the system Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system e Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location e Contact Administrator responsible for the system e System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI
65. Association Maps a secondary VLAN to a primary VLAN 3 171 Port Information Shows VLAN port type and associated primary or secondary 3 172 VLANs Port Configuration Configures VLAN port type and associated primary or 3 173 secondary VLANs Trunk Information Shows VLAN trunk type and associated primary or secondary 3 172 VLANs Trunk Configuration Configures VLAN trunk type and associated primary 3 173 or secondary VLANs Protocol VLAN 3 174 Configuration Creates a protocol group specifying the supported protocols 3 174 System Configuration Maps a protocol group toa VLAN 3 175 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol 3 176 Configuration Configures basic LLDP time parameters 3 176 Port Configuration Configures a port for receive and or transmit status allows 3 178 sending of SNMP notification messages and configures TLV information Trunk Configuration Configures a trunk for receive and or transmit status allows 3 178 sending of SNMP notification messages and configures TLV information Local Information Displays information about the local device 3 181 Remote Port Information Displays information about ports on a remote device 3 182 Remote Trunk Information Displays information about trunks on a remote device 3 182 Remote Information Details Sets the port and or trun
66. Configuration Name Port Admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow Control Disabled Port Security Disabled Max MAC Count 0 Current Status Created By User Link status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure dynamically you enable LACP before connecting the ports enabled and also disconnect the ports before disabling mn LACP TL L LE j active backup If the target switch has also enabled LACP onthe inks lt link connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically A trunk formed with another switch using LACP TANAIT will automatically be assigned the next available configured trunk ID members If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex and auto negotiation Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu see page 3 106 3 107 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Port e New Includes entry fields for creatin
67. Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config 4 172 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time time no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Comma
68. Digest see Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees on page 3 151 An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP Instances An Internal Spanning Tree IST is used to connect all the MSTP switches within an MST region A Common Spanning Tree CST interconnects all adjacent MST Regions and acts as a virtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global network Region 1 Region 1 CIST CST IST Region 4 Region 4 Region 2 Region 3 Region 2 P N Region 3 MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP RSTP MSTP protocols 3 137 Configuring the Switch Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority the MST Instance ID 0 for the Common Spanning Tree when spanning tree mode is set to MSTP page 3 141 and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for
69. Enabled Email Source Address big wheels matel com Severity 4 Warning x SMTP Server List New 192 168 1 4 lt lt Add f 192 168 1 5 mera SMTP Server Remove Email Destination Address List New chris matel com lt lt Add 5 Email Destination Address Remove Figure 3 17 Enabling and Configuring SMTP 3 33 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the host ip address followed by the mail severity level source and destination email addresses and enter the sendmail command to complete the action Use the show logging command to display SMTP information Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 4 4 45 Console config logging sendmail level 3 4 46 Console config logging sendmail source email big wheels matel com 4 46 Console config logging sendmail destination email chris matel com 4 47 Console config logging sendmail 4 47 Console config exit Console tshow logging sendmail 4 48 SMTP servers 1 92 168 1 4 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses 1 chris matel com SMTP source email address big wheels matel com SMTP status Enabled Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to reboot the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset f Figure 3 18 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch When prompted co
70. Entries List Last Updated 75974 New Neighbor Entries Count 2 Neighbor Entries Deleted Count 1 Neighbor Entries Dropped Count 0 Neighbor Entries Age out Count 0 LLDP Port Statistics Port Num Frames Recvd Num Frames Sent Num Frames Discarded 1 590 591 0 2 o o 0 3 0 o 0 al o o 0 5 o o 0 zj Figure 3 7 LLDP Device Statistics CLI This example displays LLDP statistics received from all LLDP enabled remote devices connected directly to this switch Console show lldp info statistics 4 233 LLDP Device Statistics Neighbor Entries List Last Updated 2450279 seconds New Neighbor Entries Count 21 Neighbor Entries Deleted Count Neighbor Entries Dropped Count Neighbor Entries Ageout Count ooo Interface NumFramesRecvd NumFramesSent NumFramesDiscarded 3 184 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Displaying Detailed Device Statistics Use the LLDP Device Statistics Details screen to display statistics based on traffic received through all attached LLDP enabled interfaces Web Click LLDP Device Statistics Details LLDP Device Statistics Detail Interface Query Por 1 z C Trunk Z Frames Discarded 0 Frames Invalid 0 Frames Received 14 ab ab olo lz Frames Sent TLVs Unrecognized TLVs Discarded Neighbor Ageouts Refresh Figure 3 8 LLDP Device Statistics Details CLI This example displays detailed LLDP statistics for
71. Example Console show class map Class Map match any rd_class 1 Match ip dscp 3 Class Map match any rd_class 2 Match ip precedence 5 Class Map match any rd_class 3 Match vlan 1 Console show policy map This command displays the QoS policy maps which define classification criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations Syntax show policy map policy map name class class map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting Displays all policy maps and all classes Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 250 Quality of Service Commands 4 Example Console show policy map Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map rd_policy class rd_class Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map interface This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface Syntax show policy map interface interface input interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 8 port Port number Range 1 24 e port channel channel id Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show policy map interface ethernet 1 5 Service policy rd_policy input Console 4 251 4 Command Line Interface Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP
72. Figure 3 1 Home Page 3 2 Panel Display Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Configuration Options Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply Apply Sets specified values to the system Help Links directly to web help Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 102 naum Unt jiz Mode Active bd F Link upi Link Down Figure 3 2
73. Figure 3 27 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config exit Console show snmp user No user exist SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol Privacy Protocol none Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active none Console Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 3 48 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuring SNMPv3 Groups An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read write and notify views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views Command Attributes Group Name The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters Model The group security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read access Range 1 64 characters e Write View
74. HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 86 Telnet Server Commands Table 4 34 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet GC 4 88 also specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet It also specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form without the port keyword to disable this function Use the no from with the port keyword to use the default port Syntax ip telnet server port port number no telnet server port port The TCP port used by the Telnet interface port number The TCP port number to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting e Server Enabled e Server Port 23 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 88 Authentication Commands 4 Example Console config ip telnet server Console config ip telnet port 123 Console config Secure Shell Commands This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However note that you also need to install an SSH client on the manageme
75. IEEE 802 3 2005 formally IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port e Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if flowcontrol config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 137 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 138 media type This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 17 18 Use the no form to restore the default mode Syntax media type mode no media type mode copper forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port e sfp forced Always uses the SFP port even if module not installed sfp preferred auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link Default Setting sfp preferred auto Command
76. IGMP CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 4 253 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 257 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 257 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 258 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 258 Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 4 259 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 4 254 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 255 Service Status Enabled Querier Status Enabled Leave proxy ED Disabled Query Count 10 Query Interval 100 sec Query Max Response Time 20 sec Router Port Expire Time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Disabled on all VLANs IGMP Snooping Version Version 2 Console 3 205 Configuring the Switch Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave The switch can be configured to immediately delete a member port of a multicast service if a leave packet is received at that port and the immediate leave function is enabled for the parent VLAN This allows the switch to remove a port from the multicast forwarding table without first having to send an IGMP group specific query to that interface Immediate leave can improve bandwidth usage for a network which frequently experiences many IGMP host add and leave requests Just note that immediate leave does not apply to a port if the switch has learn
77. Information Port Type Mac Address Configuration Name Port Admin Speed duplex Capabilities Flow Control Port Security Max MAC Count Current Status Created By Link status Operation speed duplex Flow control type Member Ports Console config interface ethernet 1 10 config interface ethernet 1 11 config interface ethernet 1 12 e show interfaces status port channel 1 1000T 00 16 B6 F0 3B EF Up Auto 10half Disabled Disabled 0 10full 100half 100full User Up 1000full None Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 1000full lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 4 150 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiatio
78. LLDP Commands 4 show Ildp info local device This command shows LLDP global and interface specific configuration settings for this device Syntax show Ildp info local device detail interface e detail Shows detailed information e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console tshow lldp info local device LLDP Local System Information Chassis Type MAC Address Chassis ID 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC System Name System Description 24 port 10 100 1000 2 port mini GBIC Gigabit PoE Switch System Capabilities Support Bridge System Capabilities Enable Bridge Management Address 192 168 0 192 IPv4 LLDP Port Information Port PortID Type PortID PortDesc See a et Es ek eee Eth1 1 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B ED Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 Eth1 2 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B EE Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 2 Eth1 3 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B EF Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 3 Console tshow lldp info local device detail LLDP Port Information Detail Port Eth 1 1 Port Type MAC Address Port ID 00 16 B6 F0 3B ED Port Desc Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 Console 4 231 4 Command Line Interface show Ildp info remote device This command shows LLDP global and interface specific configuration settings for remote devices attached to an LLDP
79. MAC ACL Commands ACL Information Interface Commands show interfaces switchport display description Link Aggregation Commands show lacp counters display description show lacp internal display description show lacp neighbors display description Mirror Port Commands show lacp sysid display description Rate Limit Commands PoE Commands show power mainpower parameters show power inline status parameters Address Table Commands Spanning Tree Commands Recommended STA Path Cost Range Recommended STA Path Cost Default STA Path Costs VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Editing VLAN Groups Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4 70 4 72 4 74 4 75 4 75 4 76 4 78 4 80 4 83 4 85 4 87 4 88 4 89 4 96 4 98 4 107 4 109 4 109 4 111 4 115 4 122 4 123 4 128 4 132 4 135 4 146 4 147 4 154 4 155 4 156 4 157 4 157 4 159 4 160 4 165 4 165 4 166 4 169 4 180 4 180 4 181 4 189 4 190 4 194 4 196 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 7 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 4 8 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table B 1 Displaying VLAN Information Private VLAN Commands Protocol based VLAN Commands LLDP Commands Priority Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 Default CoS Priority Levels Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values Quality of Service Commands Multicast Filtering Comm
80. MIB associated with this port is deleted Example Console config lldp reinit delay 10 Console config Ildp tx delay This command configures a delay time between the successive transmission of advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lidp tx delay seconds no lidp tx delay seconds Specifies the transmit delay Range 1 8192 seconds Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB 4 217 4 Command Line Interface objects and to increase the probability that multiple rather than single changes are reported in each transmission e This attribute must comply with the following rule 4 tx delay lt refresh interval Example Console config lldp tx delay 10 Console config IIdp admin status This command enables LLDP transmit receive or transmit and receive mode on the specified port Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax Ildp admin status rx only tx only tx rx no Ildp admin status e rx only Only receive LLDP PDUs e tx only Only transmit LLDP PDUs e tx rx Both transmit and receive LLDP Protocol Data Units PDUs Default Setting tx rx Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Exampl
81. Management Information Bases A 3 Appendix B Troubleshooting B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface B 1 Using System Logs B 2 Glossary Index xiv Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 4 17 Table 4 18 Table 4 19 Table 4 20 Table 4 21 Table 4 22 Key Features System Defaults Configuration Options Main Menu Logging Levels SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels Supported Notification Messages HTTPS Support 802 1X Statistics LACP Port Counters LACP Internal Configuration Information LACP Remote Side Settings Port Statistics Recommended STA Path Cost Range Recommended STA Path Costs Default STA Path Costs Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues CoS Priority Levels Mapping DSCP Priority Command Modes Configuration Commands Keystroke Commands Command Group Index General Commands System Management Commands Device Designation Commands System Status Commands Frame Size Commands Flash File Commands File Directory Information Line Command Syntax Event Logging Commands Logging Levels show logging flash ram display description show logging trap
82. Menu Description Page Static Multicast Router Port Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 3 208 Configuration router IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this switch including 3 209 Table multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Port Table nae multicast addresses associated with the selected 3 210 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 3 211 Configuration Globally enables MVR sets the MVR VLAN adds multicast 3 212 stream addresses Port Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 3 214 status and immediate leave status Trunk Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 3 214 status and immediate leave status Group IP Information Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream 3 215 Port Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3 216 Trunk Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3 216 Group Member Configuration Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface 3 217 DHCP Snooping 3 88 Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping and DHCP Snooping MAC Address 3 90 Verification VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping for a VLAN 3 90 Information Option Enables DHCP Snooping Information Option 3 91 Configuration Port Configuration Selects the DHCP Snooping Information Option policy 3 93 Binding Information Displays the DHCP Snooping binding information 3 94 IP Source Guard 3
83. Neighbor Entries Count 7 0 Neighbor Entries Deleted Count 0 Neighbor Entries Dropped Count 20 Neighbor Entries Ageout Count 0 Port NumFramesRecvd NumFramesSent NumFramesDiscarded a th eee ee eee eee ae ese oe eee oo Se alt 0 939 0 2 0 0 0 3 o0 0 0 Consold show lldp info statistics detail ethernet 1 1 LLDP Port Statistics Detail PortName Eth 1 1 Frames Discarded 0 Frames Invalid 0 Frames Received 0 Frames Sent 941 TLVs Unrecognized 0 TLVs Discarded 0 Neighbor Ageouts 0 Console 4 233 4 Command Line Interface Class of Service Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 2 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets queue weights 4 234 and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps IP DSCP tags to class of service values 4 240 Priority Commands Layer 2 This section describes commands used to conf
84. Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 a 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 240 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 241 4 242 Quality of Service Commands 4 Quality of Service Commands The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ classification criteria and service policies You can classify traffic based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLANs Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Table 3 7 Quality of Service Commands Command Function Mode Page class map Creates a class map for a type of traffic GC 4 244 match Defines the criteria used to classify traffic CM 4 245 policy map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces GC 4 246 class Defines a traffic classification for the policy to act on PM 4 246 value in a packet police Defines an enforcer for classified traffic PM C 4 248 service policy Applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to IC 4 249 the input of a particular interface show class map Displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria PE 4 250 used
85. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as EdgeView The switch s web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions e Set user names and passwords Setan IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters e Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering e Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs e Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs e Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration Configure IGMP multicast filtering e Upload and download system firmware via TFTP e Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP e Configure Spanning Tree parameters 2 1 2 Initial Configuration Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing e Configure up to 8 static or LACP trunks e Enable port mirroring e Set broadcast storm control on any port e Display system information and statistics Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal
86. SNMP trap messages select the information to advertise in LLDP messages select the information to advertise in MED TLV messages and specify whether or not to send MED notifications Then click Apply LLDP Port Configuration Port Admin Status SNMP Notification 1 TxRx E Enabled 2 Rx E F Enabled 3 xR E F Enabled 4 xR E F Enabled 5 Rx E F Enabled TLV Type Port Description F System Description Management Address F System Name F System Capabilities Port Description System Description Management Address F System Name F System Capab ities Port Description F System Description Management Address F System Name F System Capabilities Port Description F System Description Management Address F System Name F System Capabilities Port Description System Description Management Address F System Name F System Capab ties MED TLV Type F Port Capabilities M Extended Power F Network Policy F Location I Port Capabilities I Extended Power I Network Policy T Location I Port Capabilities I Extended Power I Network Policy F Location I Port Capabilities I Extended Power T Network Policy F Location I Port Capabilities I Extended Power T Network Policy F Location F inventory I inventory I inventory T inventory I inventory MED Notification Trunk I Enabled F Enabled I Enabled F Enabled T Enabled Figure 3 5 LLDP Port Configuration CLI Th
87. Sets the system location string GC 4 64 4 15 4 Command Line Interface hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config System Status Commands This section describes commands used to display system information Table 4 8 System Status Commands show startup config Command Function Mode Page show startup config Displays the contents of the configuration file stored in flash PE 4 16 memory that is used to start up the system show running config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 18 show system Displays system information NE PE 4 19 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user NE PE 4 20 name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 4 21 This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the system Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in n
88. This enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dot1lx system auth control 4 99 Console config Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Port Port number e Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Default Disabled Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Options Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dot1x aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise This is the default setting Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot x aware or otherwise 3 71 Configuring the Switch e Re authen Sets the client to be re authenticated after the i
89. VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address IP Address Type Lease Time Seconds 1 1 2 1 _ 00 10 85 51 69 F7 192 168 0 196 Ps 604788 Figure 3 50 DHCP Snooping Binding Information CLI This example shows how to display the DHCP Snooping binding table entries Console show ip dhcp snooping binding 4 122 MacAddress TIpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 00 10 b5 51 69 f 7 192 168 0 196 604637 dhcp snooping 1 Eth 1 2 Console 3 94 Client Security IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping on page 3 88 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Port Configuration IP Source Guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor Command Usage Setting source guard mode to SIP Source IP or SIP MAC Source IP and MAC enables this function on the selected port Use the SIP option to check the VLAN ID source IP address and port number against all entries in the bindi
90. a V3 host with the no authentication noAuth option an SNMP user account will be automatically generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host e Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 3 38 2 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages 3 Create a view with the required notification messages page 3 52 4 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 3 49 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps Enable the SNMP agent page 3 38 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages Create a view with the required notification messages page 3 52 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 3 49 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 3 44 6 Then configure a remote user page 3 47 IRN Command
91. access group ACL Information show access list show access group Contents 4 100 4 101 4 102 4 102 4 103 4 103 4 104 4 107 4 107 4 108 4 109 4 109 4 110 4 111 4 111 4 113 4 114 4 114 4 115 4 115 4 117 4 118 4 119 4 120 4 121 4 121 4 122 4 122 4 123 4 123 4 124 4 125 4 127 4 127 4 128 4 128 4 128 4 129 4 131 4 131 4 132 4 132 4 132 4 133 Contents Interface Commands 4 135 interface 4 135 description 4 136 speed duplex 4 136 negotiation 4 137 capabilities 4 138 flowcontrol 4 139 media type 4 140 shutdown 4 141 switchport packet rate 4 141 clear counters 4 142 show interfaces status 4 143 show interfaces counters 4 144 show interfaces switchport 4 145 Link Aggregation Commands 4 147 channel group 4 148 lacp 4 149 lacp system priority 4 150 lacp admin key Ethernet Interface 4 151 lacp admin key Port Channel 4 152 lacp port priority 4 153 show lacp 4 154 Mirror Port Commands 4 157 port monitor 4 157 show port monitor 4 158 Rate Limit Commands 4 159 rate limit 4 159 Power over Ethernet Commands 4 160 power mainpower maximum allocation 4 160 power inline compatible 4 161 power inline 4 162 power inline maximum allocation 4 163 power inline priority 4 163 show power inline status 4 164 show power mainpower 4 165 Address Table Commands 4 166 mac address table static 4 166 clear mac address table dynamic 4 167 show mac address table 4 167 mac address table aging time 4 168 show ma
92. an LLDP enabled remote device attached to a specific port on this switch Console show lldp info statistics detail ethernet 1 1 4 233 LLDP Port Statistics Detail PortName Eth 1 1 Frames Discarded 0 Frames Invalid 0 Frames Received p12 Frames Sent 13 TLVs Unrecognized 0 TLVs Discarded 30 Neighbor Ageouts 0 Console 3 185 Configuring the Switch Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage e The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged
93. and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above Netscape 6 2 or above and Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 4 33 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or later Windows 2000 Windows XP Linux To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 58 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 24 Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 87 copy tftp https certificate 4 24 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS SSL Range 1 65535 4 87 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port e If you change the
94. are already cluster Members or are available to become cluster Members Command Attributes e Role Indicates the current status of Candidate switches in the network MAC Address The MAC address of the Candidate switch e Description The system description string of the Candidate switch Web Click Cluster Candidate Information Cluster Candidate Information Clear cluster candidate table Role MAC Address Description Active Member 00 12 CF 23 49 CO 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Candidate 00 12 CF 0B 47 A0 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Figure 3 115 Cluster Candidate Information CLI This example shows information about cluster Candidate switches Console show cluster candidates 4 57 Cluster Candidates Role Mac Description ACTIVE MEMBER 00 12 cf 23 49 c0O 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch CANDIDATE 00 12 cf 0b 47 a0 24 48 L2 L4 IPV4 IPV6 GE Switch Console 3 223 Configuring the Switch UPnP Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a set of protocols that allows devices to connect seamlessly and simplifies the deployment of home and office networks UPnP achieves this by issuing UPnP device control protocols designed upon open Internet based communication standards The first step in UPnP networking is discovery When a device is added to the network the UPnP discovery protocol allows that device to broadcast its services to control points on the network Similarly when a cont
95. bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration 4 35 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line 4 36 System Management Commands 4 stopbits
96. by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default Basic Configuration 2 Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network e Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address jp address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 4 135 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 4 268 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 4 269 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option the switch will immediately start broadcasting service requests IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been rec
97. carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate 4 105 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode 1 1 disabled Single Host 1 2 disabled Single Host 1 25 disabled Single Host 1 26 enabled Single Host 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is enabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 26 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Multi Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console Mode ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized Auto Authorized n a n a yes yes 4 106 Authentication Commands 4 Management IP Filter Commands This section describes commands used to configure IP management access to the switch Table 4 38 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed
98. changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 4 155 4 Command Line Interface Console show lacp 1 neighbors Channel group 1 neighbors Oper State Eth 1 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 O00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Field Partner Admin System ID Table 4 7 show lacp neighbors
99. config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show SMTP servers 192 168 1 19 SMTP minimum SMTP status Console logging sendmail severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses ted this company com SMTP source email address bill this company com Enabled Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 4 18 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 49 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 50 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 50 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE PE 4 51 clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 51 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 52 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE PE 4 53 4 48 System Management Commands 4 sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from N
100. console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the ES4524M PoE is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 4 1 4 Command Line Interface Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet se
101. designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number
102. display description SMTP Alert Commands Time Commands Switch Cluster Commands UPnP Commands SNMP Commands show snmp engine id display description 1 1 1 5 3 3 3 4 3 29 3 38 3 49 3 59 3 74 3 113 3 114 3 116 3 122 3 149 3 149 3 150 3 188 3 188 3 193 4 6 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 15 4 15 4 16 4 22 4 23 4 27 XV Tables Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Table 4 25 Table 4 26 Table 4 27 Table 4 28 Table 4 29 Table 4 30 Table 4 31 Table 4 32 Table 4 33 Table 4 34 Table 4 35 Table 4 36 Table 4 37 Table 4 38 Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 2 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 9 Table 4 8 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 13 Table 4 12 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 1 Table 4 6 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 xvi show snmp view display description show snmp group display description show snmp user display description Authentication Commands User Access Commands Default Login Settings Authentication Sequence RADIUS Client Commands TACACS Client Commands Web Server Command HTTPS System Support Telnet Server Commands Secure Shell Commands show ssh display description 802 1X Port Authentication Commands IP Filter Commands Client Security Commands Port Security Commands IP Source Guard Commands DHCP Snooping Commands Access Control List Commands IP ACL Commands
103. each server To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection 4 45 4 Command Line Interface To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level eve level One of the system message levels page 4 40 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail s
104. enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 3 enable on 15400 7505 ow Eth 1 4 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 5 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 6 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 7 enable on 15400 8597 ow Eth 1 23 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 24 enable off 15400 0 ow Console Configuring Port PoE Power If a device is connected to a switch port and the switch detects that it requires more than the power budget of the port no power is supplied to the device i e port power remains off If the power demand from devices connected to switch ports exceeds the power budget set for the switch the port power priority settings are used to control the supplied power For example e If a device is connected to a low priority port and causes the switch to exceed its budget port power is not turned on e If a device is connected to a critical or high priority port and causes the switch to exceed its budget port power is turned on but the switch drops power to one or more lower priority ports Note Power is dropped from low priority ports in sequence starting from port number 1 3 130 Power over Ethernet Settings Command Attributes Port The port number on the switch e Admin Status Enables PoE power on the port Power is automatically supplied when a device is detected on the port providing that the power demanded does not exceed the switch or port power budget Default Enabled e Priority Sets the power priority for the port Op
105. enabled port Syntax show Ildp info remote device detail interface e detail Shows detailed information interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show lldp info remote device LLDP Remote Devices Information Interface ChassisId PortId SysName Eth 1 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03 04 06 Console show lldp info remote device detail ethernet 1 1 LLDP Remote Devices Information Detail Local PortName Eth 1 1 Chassis Type MAC Address Chassis Id 00 01 02 03 04 05 PortID Type MAC Address PortID 00 01 02 03 04 06 SysName SysDescr SMC6128L2 PortDescr Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 SystemCapSupported Bridge SystemCapEnabled Bridge Remote Management Address 00 01 02 03 04 05 MAC Address Console 4 232 LLDP Commands 4 show Ildp info statistics This command shows statistics based on traffic received through all attached LLDP enabled interfaces Syntax show Ildp info statistics detail interface e detail Shows detailed information e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Consold show lldp info statistics LLDP Device Statistics Neighbor Entries List Last Updated 978725 seconds New
106. field that is not the address of this switch or a zero relay address e In some cases the switch may receive DHCP packets from a client that already includes DHCP Option 82 information The switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets Either the switch can discard the Option 82 information keep the existing information or replace it with the switch s relay information Command Attributes DHCP Snooping Information Option Status Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay Default Disabled e DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy Specifies how to handle DHCP client request packets which already contain Option 82 information Drop Drop the request packet instead of relaying it Keep Retain the Option 82 information in the client request insert the relay agent s address when DHCP snooping is enabled and unicast the packet to the DHCP server When the Option 82 policy is set to keep the original information in the request packet the frame type specified i e Remote ID or Circuit ID is ignored Replace Replace the Option 82 information in the client s request with information about the relay agent itself insert the relay agent s address when DHCP snooping is enabled and unicast the packet to the DHCP server This is the default policy Web Click DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration Enable Option 82 and set the policy for handling r
107. first define a class map then define a policy map and finally bind the service policy to the required interface e You can only bind one policy map to an interface The current firmware does not allow you to bind a policy map to an egress queue Command Attributes e Ports Specifies a port e Ingress Applies the rule to ingress traffic e Enabled Check this to enable a policy map on the specified port e Policy Map Select the appropriate policy map from the scroll down box Web Click QoS DiffServ Service Policy Check Enabled and choose a Policy Map for a port from the scroll down box then click Apply Service Policy Settings Ports Ingress r I Enabled zj 2 F Enabled z B T Enabled J la T Enabled zi 5 F Enabled rd_policy 3 6 T Enabled z zj Figure 3 100 Service Policy Settings CLI This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 5 4 135 Console config if service policy input rd_policy 3 4 249 Console config if 3 201 Configuring the Switch Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time Unicast applications such as videoconferencing or Flow streaming audio A multicast server does not have to establish a separate connection with each la a client It merely broadcasts its service to the O ae network and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their
108. for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP VLAN Commands 4 Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if switchport native vian This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan vian id no switchport native vlan vian id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config
109. for classifying traffic show policy map Displays the QoS policy maps which define classification PE 4 250 criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations show policy map interface Displays the configuration of all classes configured for all PE 4 251 service policies on the specified interface To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic follow these steps 1 Use the class map command to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic and enter the Class Map configuration mode 2 Use the match command to select a specify type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN 3 Set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match command 4 Use the policy map command to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled and enter the Policy Map configuration mode 5 Use the class command to identify the class map and enter Policy Map Class configuration mode A policy map can contain multiple class statements 6 Use the set command to modify the QoS value for matching traffic class and use the policer command to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate 7 Use the service policy command to assign a policy map to a spec
110. frames other than Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req ld The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Ra ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 3 74 User Authentication Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Portlet z Query Rx EAPOL Start O Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff O Rx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSrc 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total O Tx EAPOL Total 1 Rx EAP Resp ld O Tx EAP Reqfld 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Req Oth 0 Refresh Figure 3 38 Displaying 802 1X Port Statistics CLI This example displays the 802 1X statistics for port 4 Console show dotix statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 104 Eth 1 4 Rx EXPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Res
111. guard binding table Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static Dynamic VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero in the table Command Usage Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table are automatically configured with an infinite lease time Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping 3 96 Client Security are configured by the DHCP server itself of which static entries include a manually configured lease time e Static bindings are processed as follows If there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address a new entry is added to binding table using the type static IP source guard binding lf there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of entry is static IP source guard binding then the new entry will replace the old one If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source guard binding Command Attributes e Static Binding Table Counts The total number of static entries in the table e Current Static Binding Table The list of current static entries in the table e Port Switch port number Range 1 24 e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 e MAC Address
112. half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Command Attributes Jumbo Packet Status Configures support for jumbo frames Default Disabled Web Click System Jumbo Frames Enable or disable support for jumbo frames and click Apply Jumbo Frames Jumbo Packet Status m Enabled Figure 3 8 Enabling Jumbo Frames CLI Specify the jumbo frame status Console config jumbo frame 4 22 Console config Configuring the Switch Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Note Runtime code can also be upgraded by using Batch Upgrade Batch Upgrade can discover switches on local or other networks After discovering the switches Batch Upgrade can then be set to automatically upgrade the runtime code on all discovered switches Batch Upgrade is provided in the Batch Upgrade folder in the CD provided with this switch For details see the Batch Upgrade document in this Batch Upgrade folder Command Attributes e File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copi
113. in a completely unobtrusive manner e The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface e The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX 4 158 Rate Limit Commands 4 Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands This fu
114. information about the interfaces attached to the MVR domains PE 4 266 interface show mvr Shows information about the multicast groups assigned to the MVR PE 4 267 members domains mvr Global Configuration This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration MVR globally on the switch statically configures MVR multicast group IP address es using the group keyword or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier using the vlan keyword Use the no form of this command without any keywords to globally disable MVR Use the no form with the group keyword to remove a specific address or range of addresses or the vlan keyword restore the default MVR VLAN Syntax no mvr group p address count vlan vian ia jp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 vian id MVR VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting e MVR is disabled e No MVR group address is defined e The default number of contiguous addresses is 0 e MVR VLAN ID is 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the mvr group command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will join an MVR VLAN Any multicast data associated with an MVR group is sent from all source ports and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group e The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used f
115. jp address Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic from the IP address specified for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 e receiver Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive multicast data source Configure the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups Default Setting The port type is not defined No port is a member of any configured multicast group Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for multicast filtering e Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within an MVR VLAN Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a receiver port using the group keyword However if a receiver port is statically configured as a member of an MVR VLAN its status will be inactive Also note that VLAN membership for MVR receiver ports cannot be set to trunk mode see the switchport mode command on page 4 197 4 263 4 Command Line Interface One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports A source port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined through IGMP snoop
116. label an interface Range 1 64 characters e Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons e Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled 3 102 Port Configuration Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control that is with auto negotiation disabled Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3 2005 formally IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full d
117. local multicast switch N NO router Although this approach reduces the Na network overhead required by a multicast server the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every multicast switch router it passes through to Flow ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts which subscribed to this service 7 N Multicast a ON This switch can use Internet Group Management Sk Protocol IGMP to filter multicast traffic IGMP Snooping can be used to passively monitor or AN a fos rN snoop on exchanges between attached hosts LJ AJ AA AA and an IGMP enabled device most commonly a multicast router In this way the switch can discover the ports that want to join a multicast group and set its filters accordingly If there is no multicast router attached to the local subnet multicast traffic and query messages may not be received by the switch In this case Layer 2 IGMP Query can be used to actively ask the attached hosts if they want to receive a specific multicast service IGMP Query thereby identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multic
118. logging sendmail 4 47 show logging sendmail 4 48 Time Commands 4 48 snip client 4 49 sntp server 4 50 sntp poll 4 50 show sntp 4 51 clock timezone 4 51 calendar set 4 52 show calendar 4 53 Switch Cluster Commands 4 53 cluster 4 54 cluster commander 4 54 cluster ip pool 4 55 cluster member 4 56 rcommand 4 56 show cluster 4 57 show cluster members 4 57 show cluster candidates 4 57 UPnP Commands 4 58 upnp device 4 58 upnp device ttl 4 59 upnp device advertise duration 4 59 show upnp 4 60 SNMP Commands 4 60 snmp server 4 61 show snmp 4 61 snmp server community 4 62 snmp server contact 4 63 snmp server location 4 64 snmp server host 4 64 snmp server enable traps 4 66 snmp server engine id 4 67 show snmp engine id 4 68 snmp server view 4 69 show snmp view 4 70 snmp server group 4 71 show snmp group 4 72 vii Contents viii snmp server user show snmp user Authentication Commands User Account Commands username enable password Authentication Sequence authentication login authentication enable RADIUS Client radius server host radius server port radius server key radius server retransmit radius server timeout show radius server TACACS Client tacacs server host tacacs server port tacacs server key show tacacs server Web Server Commands ip http port ip http server ip http secure server ip http secure port Telnet Server Commands ip telnet server Secure Shell Commands ip ssh server ip ssh timeout ip ssh
119. mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 15 Spanning Tree Commands Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 170 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 171 spanning tree forward time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4 172 spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4 173 spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4 173 spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 174 spanning tree pathcost Configures the path cost method for RSTP MSTP GC 4 175 method spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for RSTP MSTP GC 4 175 transmission limit spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4 189 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4 176 mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance MST 4 177 name Configures the name for the mu
120. map interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01234567 Priority Queue 10012 23 3 Console 4 239 4 Command Line Interface Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 This section describes commands used to configure Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic priority on the switch Table 3 5 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page mapipdscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 240 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 241 show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 242 map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config 4 240 Class of Service Commands 4 map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point pr
121. members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port 4 171 4 Command Line Interface e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Becareful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree
122. need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 40 and Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users on page 3 47 The engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters If less than 64 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 0123456789 is equivalent to 0123456789 followed by 54 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv8 Remote Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Remote IP Host Action I C Add go000000030004626316 54321 192 168 1 19 Remove Figure 3 25 Setting an Engine ID CLI This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 4 67 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 68 Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console 3 44 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view Command Attributes User Name The name of user c
123. no form to disable LLDP MED notifications Syntax no Ildp mednotification Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at the interval specified by the Ildp notification interval command page 4 215 Trap notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB IEEE 802 1AB the LLDP MED MIB ANSI TIA 1057 or organization specific LLDP EXT DOT1 and LLDP EXT DOT3 MIBs SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp server host command page 4 64 e Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP notifications is not transmitted Only state changes that exist at the time of a trap notification are included in the transmission An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of IldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime 4 219 4 Command Line Interface to detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification events missed due to throttling or transmission loss Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lldp mednotification Console config if Ildp basic tlv management ip address This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the management address for this device Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp basic tlv management ip address Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Inter
124. of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access e If a port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 102 Command Attributes e Port Port number Name Descriptive text page 4 136 e Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 106 and 3 107 3 79 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security Port Secur
125. of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted The following filtering modes are supported Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified packets can also be filtered based on the TCP control code e MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs The maximum number of ACLs is e Each ACL can have up to 60 rules e This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only Only one IP ACL or one MAC ACL can be bound to any port e Each ACL can have up to 60 rules However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports Use
126. of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution Command History 2 config 1 show history Configuration Command History 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console 4 12 General Commands 4 The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console tconfig Console config reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use
127. of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST 3 138 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration e VLANs configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message e Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports i
128. on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified by the ip dhcp snooping trust command page 4 118 e When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled 4 117 4 Command Line Interface When DHCP snooping is globally enabled configuration changes for specific VLANs have the following effects If DHCP snooping is disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table Example This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 Console config Related Command ip dhcp snooping 4 115 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 118 ip dhcp snooping trust This command configures the specified interface as trusted Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping trust Default Setting All interfaces are untrusted Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall e Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted and all other port
129. or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Ingress Filtering is always enabled Default Enabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting on page 3 160 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled GARP Join Timer 6 The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 GARP Leave Timer The inte
130. password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve no password password 0 7 password no username name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 access level evel Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec e The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 28 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 C
131. payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console Related Commands interface 4 135 4 272 Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists 256 ACLs 60 rules per ACL DHCP Client Port Configuration 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000 Mbps at full duplex SFP Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring One source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Algorithm Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round R
132. permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria including IP 4 125 source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number EXT ACL protocol type and TCP control code show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 127 ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 127 show ip access group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 127 access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule An ACL can contain up to 32 rules 4 123 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl
133. port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP system priority Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface If the port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 8 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 148 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The follow
134. role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPvz2 entity acting in an agent role has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated RMON Events V2 risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps fallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps Private Traps swPowerStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 1 7 1 0 1 This trap is sent when the power state ChangeTrap chang
135. servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 76 password 4 31 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration 4 31 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state e The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Comman
136. snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth priv read readview write writeview notify notifyview no snmp server group groupname groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 37 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters writeview Defines the view for write access 1 64 characters e notifyview Defines the view for notifications 1 64 characters Default Setting Default groups public22 read only private23 read write readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 e writeview Nothing is defined e notifyview Nothing is defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A group sets the access policy for the assigned users e When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command e When privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption e For additional information on the notification messages supported by this switch see Supported Notification Messages on page 3 49 Also note that the authentication link up and link down messages are lega
137. snooping binding table The priority of execution for these filtering commands is Port Security Access Control Lists IP Source Guard and then DHCP Snooping Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message Table 4 1 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 110 mac address table static Maps a static addresstoa portina VLAN Jec 4 166 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 167 4 109 4 Command Line Interface port security This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violat
138. snooping for the selected VLAN When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN 3 90 Client Security Web Click DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration Enable DHCP Snooping on the required VLAN and click Apply DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration VLAN ID 1 he DHCP Snooping Status V Enabled Figure 3 47 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration CLI This example enables DHCP Snooping for VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 4 117 Console config DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP provides a relay option for sending information about local DHCP clients to DHCP servers Also known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use this information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services such as IP Spoofing Client Identifier Spoofing MAC Address Spoofing and Address Exhaustion Command Usage DHCP Snooping see page 3 90 must be enabled for Option 82 to function e When Option 82 is enabled the requesting client or an intermediate relay agent that has used the information fields to describe itself can be identified in the DHCP request packets forwarded by the switch and in reply packets sent back from
139. sources to the requesting hosts Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 208 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch 3 203 Configuring the Switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 210 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage e IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly Note Unknown multicast traffic is floode
140. ssh server key size key size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch e The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config 4 93 4 Command Line Interface delete public key This command deletes the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type e rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate This command generates the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type e rsa RSA Version 1 key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1 5 clients and DSA Version 2 for SSHv2 clients This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory Some SSH client pr
141. switch it notifies the client to proceed with the authentication process Otherwise it rejects the request c The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch d When the server receives this message it checks whether the supplied key is acceptable for authentication and if so it then checks whether the signature is correct If both checks succeed the client is authenticated Note The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions e The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate DSA and RSA host keys before enabling the SSH server 4 91 4 Command Line Interface Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key genera
142. switchport packet rate command on page 4 141 e The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system command page 4 19 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config 4 22 System Management Commands 4 File Management Commands Managing Firmware Firmware can be uploaded and downloaded to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation The switch can also be set to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version When downloading runtime code the destination file name can be specified to replace the current image or the file can be first downloaded using a different name from the current runtime code file and then the new file set as the startup file Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Configuration settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore switch settings The configuration file can be downloaded under a new file name and then set as the startup file or the current startup configuration file can be specified as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Table 4 10 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a co
143. that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server Secure Shell Commands on page 4 89 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage 4 24 The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination System Management Commands 4 The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help e For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 58 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS SSL for a secure connection see ip http server on page 4 86 Example The following
144. that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters If less than 26 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 1234 is equivalent to 1234 followed by 22 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 26 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Engine ID Engine ID 80000034030030f1 b0e7a00000 Default Seve Figure 3 24 Setting an Engine ID CLI This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engine id local 12345abcdef 4 67 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 4 68 Local SNMP engineID 12345abcdef000000000000000 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console 3 43 Configuring the Switch Specifying a Remote Engine ID To send inform messages to an SNMPVv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore
145. the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 Por STA Statuslrransitions Cost Bridge Port CPF Path Cost Link type ledge Port PO Role ombor 1 Forwarding 1 0 32768 0016B6F03BEC 128 1 100000 Point to Point Enabled Designated 2 Discarding 0 32768 0016B6F03BEC 128 2 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 0 32768 001686F03BEC 128 3 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 4 Discarding 0 0 32768 0016B6F03BEC 128 4 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 5 Discarding 0 0 32768 0016B6F03BEC 128 5 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 6 Discarding 0 0 32768 001686F03BEC 128 6 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 7 Discarding 0 0 32768 001686F038EC 128 7 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled 8 Discarding 0 0 32768 0016B6F03BEC 128 8 2000000 Shared Enabled Disabled x Figure 3 3 MSTP Port Information CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 3 138 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 4 187 Spanning tree information Spanning Tree Mode MSTP Spanning Tree Enabled Disabled Enabled Instance 0 VLANs Configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20
146. the native VLAN for the interface e Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if 4 200 VLAN Commands 4 switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add v an list remove vian list no switchport forbidden vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to
147. the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN Client Security Commands 4 Ifthe DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted ip dhcp snooping trust page 4 118 Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped Example This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the switch Console config ip dhcp snooping Console config Related Command ip dhcp snooping vian 4 117 ip dhcp snooping trust 4 118 ip dhcp snooping vian This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping vian vian id vian id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 4 115 and enabled
148. the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh threshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold 4 33 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 34 silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after
149. the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around 1 to 3 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs MSTP When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily 3 136 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration isolate some of the group members MSTP which is based on RSTP for fast convergence is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Using multiple spanning trees can provide multiple forwarding paths and enable load balancing One or more VLANs can be grouped into a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTP builds a separate Multiple Spanning Tree MST for each instance to maintain connectivity among each of the assigned VLAN groups MSTP then builds a Internal Spanning Tree IST for the Region containing all commonly configured MSTP bridges DIST MST1 gt for this Region an Tai Ragion R J y An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same MST Configuration Identifiers including the Region Name Revision Level and Configuration
150. the switch If no management address is available the 3 178 Link Layer Discovery Protocol address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address The interface number and OID are included to assist SNMP applications in the performance of network discovery by indicating enterprise specific or other starting points for the search such as the Interface or Entity MIB Since there are typically a number of different addresses associated with a Layer 3 device an individual LLDP PDU may contain more than one management address TLV Every management address TLV that reports an address that is accessible ona port and protocol VLAN through the particular port should be accompanied by a port and protocol VLAN TLV that indicates the VLAN identifier VID associated with the management address reported by this TLV System Name The system name is taken from the sysName object in RFC 3418 which contains the system s administratively assigned name To configure the system name see Displaying System Information on page 3 11 System Capabilities The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The in
151. the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down 4 170 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN
152. the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage Field Attributes e Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host e RSA The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus e DSA The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus e Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA DSA Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Note The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1 5 clients and DSA Version 2 for SSHv2 clients Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM i e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page e Clear This button clears the host key from both volatile memory RAM and non volatile mem
153. the traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes WRR Setting Table 9 Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 15 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Highlight a traffic class i e output queue then click Apply Queue Scheduling Traffic Class 0 weight 1 Traffic Class 1 weight 2 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 8 Weight Value 1 15 2 Figure 3 95 Configuring Queue Scheduling CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config queue bandwidth 1 2 3 4 4 236 Console config exit Console show queue bandwidth 4 238 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight Console 19 CLI shows Queue ID 3 191 Configuring the Switch Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports one method of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header
154. this page and click Add to open the Match Class Settings page Enter the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page Remove Class Removes the selected class Class Configuration Class Name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Type Only one match command is permitted per class map so the match any field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command Description A brief description of a class map Range 1 64 characters Add Adds the specified class Back Returns to previous page without making any changes Match Class Settings Class Name List of the class maps ACL List Name of an access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters IP DSCP A DSCP value Range 0 63 IP Precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 VLAN A VLAN Range 1 4094 Add Adds specified criteria to the class Up to 16 items are permitted per class Remove Deletes the selected criteria from the class 3 196 Quality of Service Web Click QoS DiffServ then click Add Class to create a new class or Edit Rules to change the rules of an existing class Class Map Modify Name amp Description Class Name Type im class match any Remove Class Description Class Name Type match any gt Description M
155. to the entire MIB tree Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table Console config snmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config 4 69 4 Command Line Interface This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 23 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry 4 70 SNMP Commands 4 snmp server group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use the no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax
156. trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address REMOTELOG server IP address Console cooo ooo cooo ooo Table 4 16 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command REMOTELOG facility type The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility command REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command server IP address Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 48 show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory Syntax show log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 44 System Management Commands 4 Example The following example shows the
157. used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard Glossary 1 Glossary GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 10 VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet fr
158. you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tip to file z TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 0 110 Source File Name bs4524mv poe_fw File Type opcode x ce es4524m poe_fw1005 bix 7 Destination File Name pa E Figure 3 9 Copy Firmware If you download to a new destination file go to the System File Management Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes C Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File IN 455 startup1 cfg Config File fv 4085 es4524m poe_fw1005 bix Operation_Code Y 3489580 Figure 3 10 Setting the Startup Code 3 21 Configuring the Switch To delete a file select System File Management Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Delete Name Type Startup Size bytes O Factory_Default_Config cfy Config_File N 455 startup Config_File Y 4555 C startup1 cfg Config_File N 3675 10026 Operation_Code N 3850952 0 yvi0028 Operation_Code Y 3862936 Figure 3 11 Deleting Files CLI Enter the IP addres
159. zeroes e VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets 3 162 VLAN Configuration Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaulfVian Enabled VLAN ID 1 4094 2 lt lt Add VLAN Name R amp D Remove Status M Enable zj Figure 3 79 Creating Virtual LANs CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 194 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 195 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 4 202 Default VLAN ID 1 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Ethl 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18
160. 0 2 port mini GBIC Gigabit PoE Switch System Capabilities Supported Bridge System Capabilities Enabled Bridge Management Address 192 168 0 192 IPv4 Port Desc Port ID Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 00 16 B6 F0 3B ED Ethernet Port on unit 1 pot 2 00 16 B6 F0 3B EE Ethemet Port on unit 1 port 3 00 16 B6 F0 3B EF Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 4 00 16 B6 F0 3B F0 Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 5 00 16 B6 F0 3B F1 Figure 3 91 LLDP Local Device Information CLI This example displays LLDP information for the local switch Console tshow lldp info local device 4 231 LLDP Local System Information Chassis Type MAC Address Chassis ID 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC System Name System Description 24 port 10 100 1000 2 port mini GBIC Gigabit PoE Switch System Capabilities Support Bridge System Capabilities Enable Bridge Management Address 192 168 0 192 IPv4 LLDP Port Information Port PortID Type PortID PortDesc ee fp SSSeeeeSessseses See se esessssseses Sassesesesce N ssl sesesessese Eth1 1 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B ED Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 Eth1 2 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B EE Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 2 Eth1 3 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B EF Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 3 Eth1 4 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B FO Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 4 Eth1 5 MAC Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B F1 Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 5 3 181 Configuring th
161. 0 Console config if 4 103 4 Command Line Interface show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface interface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface that has enabled 802 1X including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts page 4 100 Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 100 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items reauth enabled Periodic re authentication page 4 102 reauth period Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 4 103 quiet period Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 4 102 tx period Time a port waits during authentication session
162. 0 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c police This command defines an policer for classified traffic Use the no form to remove a policer Syntax no police rate kbps burst byte exceed action drop set e rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower e burst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 524288 bytes e drop Drop packet when specified rate or burst are exceeded e set Set DSCP service to the specified value Range 0 63 Default Setting Drop out of profile packets Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration Command Usage e You can configure up to 64 policers i e meters or class maps for each of the following access list types MAC ACL Standard IP ACL and Extended IP ACL e Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the burst byte field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the rate bps option 4 248 Quality of Service Commands 4 Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets
163. 00 000 000 for long path cost method Table 4 3 Recommended STA Path Cost Range Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 3 10 2 000 200 000 Table 4 4 Recommended STA Path Cost Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet Half Duplex 100 2 000 000 Full Duplex 95 1 999 999 Trunk 20 1 000 000 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 4 10 000 Trunk 3 5 000 26 Use the spanning tree pathcost method command on page 4 175 to set the path cost method 4 180 Default Setting Spanning Tree Commands 4 By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Table 4 5 Default STA Path Costs Command Mode Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Comman
164. 084e0343a0486f 05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1lf 783edd 27d254ca VLAN database VLAN 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active VLAN 4093 media ethernet state active spanning tree MST configuration interface VLAN 1 IP address DHCP interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 ip name server auto line console silent time 0 line vty end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 16 show system This command displays system information Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 11 e The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance 4 19 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show system System Description 24 port 10 100 1000 2 port mini GBIC Gigabit PoE Switch System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 1 7 System Information System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 7 minutes and 48 43 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC Address Unit1 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC Web Server Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST Result Tiner TESE sects eden EE RREA PAS
165. 0BASE T port or trunk If not used the success of the link process cannot be guaranteed e When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 137 speed duplex 4 136 flowcontrol 4 139 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Auto negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE T port or trunk If not used the success of the link process cannot be guaranteed Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled 4 139 4 Command Line Interface back pressure is used for half duplex operation and
166. 1 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 138 speed duplex 4 136 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric 1000full Supports 1 Gbps full duplex operation e 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation e flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full 4 138 Interface Commands 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Auto negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 100
167. 1 u 4093 t 64 Kbits second NONE NONE NONE Console Table 4 3 show interfaces switchport display description Field Description Broadcast Threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 141 Multicast Threshold Shows if multicast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 141 Unknown unicast Threshold Shows if unknown unicast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 141 LACP Status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 149 Ingress Rate Limit Shows if ingress rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 159 Egress Rate Limit Shows if egress rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 159 4 146 VLAN Membership Mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 197 Ingress Rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 198 Note Ingress filtering is always enabled Acceptable Frame Type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 197 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 199 Priority for Untagged Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 235 Traffic Link Aggregation Commands 4 T
168. 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters e hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 1 13 hours e minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes e before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 51 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 51 calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year hour Hour in 24 hour format Range
169. 16B6F03BEC Enabled 0 Enabled Enabled Auto Shared Enabled Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 145 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk 3 Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only 13 STA Port Configuration only 3 148 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The following interface attributes can be configured
170. 20 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 3 115 Configuring the Switch Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Table 3 6 LACP Remote Side Settings Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number a port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding informa
171. 21 4 24 UPnP configuration 3 224 user password 3 54 4 76 4 77 Index 4 Vv VLANs 3 157 4 189 4 205 adding static members 3 164 3 165 4 200 creating 3 162 4 195 description 3 157 displaying basic information 3 160 4 191 displaying port members 3 161 4 202 egress mode 3 167 4 197 interface configuration 3 166 4 197 4 201 private 3 168 3 174 4 203 protocol 4 208 WwW Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 3 home page 3 2 menu list 3 3 3 4 panel display 3 3 ES4524M PoE E012008 ST RO1 149100037400A
172. 25 0 0 10 INACTIVE None Console Table 4 2 show mvr members display description Field Description MVR Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Status Shows whether or not the there are active subscribers for this multicast group Note that this field will also display INACTIVE if MVR is globally disabled Members Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Also shows if an interface has dynamically joined a multicast group d or if a multicast group has been statically bound to the interface s 4 267 4 Command Line Interface IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Basic IP Configuration This section describes commands used to configure an IP address for the switch Table 4 3 IP Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 268 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC 4 269 other subnetworks ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DCHP client
173. 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 7 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level 3 29 Configuring the Switch Web Click System Log System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs System Log Status Disabied z Flash Level 0 7 E Ram Level 0 7 ig Figure 3 14 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 39
174. 3 You can configure up to 64 policers i e meters or class maps for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ingress ports Also note that the maximum number of classes that can be applied to a policy map is 16 Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the Burst field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the Rate option After using the policy map to define packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing it must be assigned to a specific interface by a service policy to take effect Command Attributes Policy Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a policy map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 64 characters for the description Edit Classes Opens the Policy Rule Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Add Policy Opens the Policy Configuration page Enter a policy name and description on this page and click Add to open the Policy Rule Settings page Enter the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Remove Policy Deletes a specified policy Policy Configuration Policy Name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters Description A brief description of a policy map Range 1 64 characters Add Adds the s
175. 3 138 4 171 Index S secure shell 3 61 4 89 Secure Shell configuration 3 61 4 92 4 93 security client 3 78 serial port configuring 4 29 SNMP community string 3 39 4 62 enabling traps 3 40 4 66 trap manager 3 40 4 66 version 3 3 37 3 43 4 64 4 67 4 74 software displaying version 3 13 4 21 downloading 3 21 4 24 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 61 4 92 4 93 STA 3 136 4 169 edge port 3 147 3 150 4 182 global settings configuring 3 141 4 170 4 175 global settings displaying 3 138 4 187 interface settings 3 145 3 154 3 155 4 186 4 187 link type 3 147 3 150 4 184 path cost 3 138 3 147 path cost method 3 142 4 175 port priority 3 147 4 181 protocol migration 3 150 4 186 transmission limit 3 142 4 175 standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 3 24 4 24 displaying 3 21 4 16 setting 3 21 4 28 static addresses setting 3 132 4 166 statistics port 3 122 4 144 STP 3 141 4 171 STP Also see STA switch settings restoring 4 23 saving 4 23 Index 3 Index system clock setting 3 35 4 48 system software downloading from server 3 21 4 24 T TACACS logon authentication 3 55 4 83 time setting 3 35 4 48 traffic class weights 3 191 4 236 trap manager 2 7 3 40 4 66 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 105 4 147 LACP 3 107 4 149 static 3 106 4 148 U unknown unicast storm threshold 4 141 upgrading software 3
176. 4 Address Table Settings Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes e Aging Status Enables disables the function Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status M Enabled laging Time 10 630 400 E Figure 3 72 Setting the Aging Time CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 4 168 Console config 3 135 Configuring the Switch Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s STP STP uses a distributed algorithm
177. 54725415020245593 1998685443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627 2571413428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486 5468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580 58176716709574804776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsSRIB8ydEXcxM3 dyV yrDbKStI1nzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ20XhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XF fAKx15 fwF fv J1Pd0kFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE8 5 PWxDZMaCNBPj BrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAATEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRJ5kh47wY4i8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMU01VFD1y3IR 2G3 95NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9MCOFT yyEfbobMJZi 80GCst SNOxrZZVnMqwrTY fdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg4510Ac27s6TLdtny1lwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAUJ 8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7Ej Oy Dbs1loBf PuSAb4oAsyj KXKVYNLQKTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF DjKGWt PNIQqabKgYCw2 o dVzxX4Gg yqdT1YmGA7 fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 37 802 1X Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page dot1x system auth control Enables dot1x globally on the switch GC 4 99 dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4 99 do
178. 6400 seconds Default 100 seconds e TTL Value Sets the time to live TTL value for UPnP messages transmitted by this device Range 1 255 Default 4 Web Click UPNP Configuration and enter the desired variables UPNP Configuration UPNP Status M Enabled Advertising Duration 60 86400 200 seconds TTL Value 1 255 fe Figure 3 116 UPnP Configuration CLI This example enables UPnP sets the device advertise duration to 200 seconds the device TTL to 6 and displays information about basic UPnP configuration Console config upnp device 4 58 Console config upnp device advertise duration 200 4 59 Console config upnp device ttl 6 4 59 Console config end Console show upnp 4 60 UPnP global settings Status Enabled Advertise duration 200 TEL 6 Console 3 225 Configuring the Switch 3 226 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 Atthe
179. 6B6F03BEC Current Root Port F Current Root Cost 10000 Number of Topology Changes 2 Last Topology Change Time sec 10 Transmission Limit 3 Path Cost Method Long Admin Status Enabled Role Designate State Forwarding External Admin Path Cost 0 Internal Admin Path Cost 0 External Oper Path Cost 2000000 Internal Oper Path Cost 2000000 Priority 128 Designated Cost 0 Designated Port 128 Designated Root 32768 1 0016B6F03BEC Designated Bridge 32768 1 0016B6F03BEC Fast Forwarding Enabled Forward Transitions 1 Admin Edge Port Enabled Oper Edge Port Enabled Admin Link Type Auto Oper Link Type Shared Spanning Tree Status Enabled CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 176 Console config mst mst 1 priority 4096 4 177 Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 4 176 Console config mst 3 153 Configuring the Switch Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 145 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display
180. 7 Spanning Tree Information Spanning Tree Mode MSTP Spanning Tree Enabled Disabled Enabled Instance 0 VLANs Configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max Hops 20 Remaining Hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC Current Root Port 0 Current Root Cost 0 Number of Topology Changes 0 Last Topology Change Time sec 4291 Transmission Limit 3 Path Cost Method Long Eth 1 1 Information Admin Status Enabled Role Designate State Forwarding External Admin Path Cost 0 Internal Admin Path Cost 0 External Oper Path Cost 100000 Internal Oper Path Cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated Cost 0 Designated Port 128 1 Designated Root 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC Designated Bridge 32768 0 0016B6F03BEC Fast Forwarding Enabled Forward Transitions 1 Admin Edge Port Enabled Oper Edge Port Enabled Admin Link Type Auto Oper Link Type Point to point Spanning Tree Status Enabled Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network 3 140 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This
181. 73 spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config 4 174 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol e short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1 Spanning Tree Protocol Default Sett
182. AN Commands 4 Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security between ports using primary and secondary VLAN groups A primary VLAN contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private VLAN group while a secondary or community VLAN contains community ports that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN In all cases the promiscuous ports are designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet while the community ports provide restricted access to local users Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch and multiple community VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Table 4 4 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page Edit Private VLAN Groups private vian Adds or deletes primary or community VLANs VC 4 204 private vlan association Associates a community VLAN with a primary VLAN VC 4 205 Configure Private VLAN Interfaces switchport mode Sets an interface to host mode or promiscuous mode IC 4 205 private vlan switchport private vlan Associates an interface with a secondary VLAN IC 4 206 host association switchport private vlan Maps an interface to a primary VLAN IC 4 207 mapping Display Private VLAN Information sho
183. AN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 202 4 195 4 Command Line Interface Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 2 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vian Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC 4 196 switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 4 197 switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 4 197 acceptable frame types switchport ingress filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 198 switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an interface IC 4 199 switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 4 200 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 191 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 201 switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 235 interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan vian id vian id D of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows h
184. AN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port This section describes the Access Control List commands Table 4 4 Access Control List Commands Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configure ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP port number 4 123 protocol type and TCP control code MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and 4 128 Ethernet type ACL Information Display ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs assigned to each port 4 132 4 122 IP ACLs Access Control List Commands 4 The commands in this section configure ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code To configure IP ACLs first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules and then bind the access list to one or more ports Table 4 5 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode for GC 4 123 standard or extended IP ACLs permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP address IP 4 124 STD ACL
185. Attributes e Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers e Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured Trap Manager IP Address IP address of a new management station to receive notification messages Trap Manager Community String Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page for 3 40 Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1 or 2c clients or define a corresponding User Name in the SNMPv3 Users page for Version 3 clients Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager Trap Version Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Trap Security Level When trap version 3 is selected you must specify one of the following security levels Default noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Trap Inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and
186. Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console 3 126 Power over Ethernet Settings Power over Ethernet Settings This switch can provide DC power to a wide range of connected devices eliminating the need for an additional power source and cutting down on the amount of cables attached to each device Once configured to supply power an automatic detection process is initialized by the switch that is authenticated by a PoE signature from the connected device Detection and authentication prevent damage to non 802 3af compliant devices The switch s power management enables total switch power and individual port power to be controlled within a configured power budget Port power can be automatically turned on and off f
187. Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Untagged port based tagged and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then uses the EAP between the switch and the authentication server to verify the client s right to access the network via an authentication server i e RADIUS server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection SNMP V
188. Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 GVRP Configuration Disabled Console garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall e join leave leaveall Timer to set timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 192 VLAN Commands 4 Command Usage Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs e Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successful
189. Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 49 sntp poll 4 50 show sntp 4 51 sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no snip poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 50 System Management Commands 4 Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console Related Commands snip client 4 49 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server
190. Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config 4 40 System Management Commands 4 logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use this command more than once to build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility type type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding
191. Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write v zl Figure 3 22 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 62 Console config 3 39 Configuring the Switch Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as EdgeView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other notification messages from the switch Command Usage e If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the Trap Manager Community String is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use V3 authentication or encryption options authNoPriv or authPriv the user name must first be defined in the SNMPv3 Users page page 3 45 Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify
192. Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 256 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 4 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Multicast VLAN Registration Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol that controls access to a single network wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic such as television channels or video on demand across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers This protocol can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN This makes it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network without having to use any multicast routing protocol MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups from the MVR VLAN users in different IEEE 802 1Q or private VLANs cannot exchange any information except through upper level routing services e S a Multicast Router Satellite Services SS ra ess Sosa seen HERH ee Service Network Multicast Server Layer 2 Switch Source J Port 4 Set top Box Lud 3 211 Configuring the Swi
193. Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c service policy This command applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to the ingress queue of a particular interface Use the no form to remove the policy map from this interface Syntax no service policy input policy map name e input Apply to the input traffic policy map name Name of the policy map for this interface Range 1 16 characters Default Setting No policy map is attached to an interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can only assign one policy map to an interface e You must first define a class map then define a policy map and finally use the service policy command to bind the policy map to the required interface Example This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if service policy input rd_policy Console config if 4 249 4 Command Line Interface show class map This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for classifying traffic Syntax show class map class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting Displays all class maps Command Mode Privileged Exec
194. Console config logging history ram 0 4 40 Console config end Console show logging flash 4 43 Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level emergencies Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a specified level Command Attributes e Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Enabled e Logging Facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 7 The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 e Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP a
195. D Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name bob Action Source MAC Source Destination MAC Destination vip vib Ethernet Ethernet Type Packet Remove Address Bitmask Address Bitmask Bitmask Type Bitmask Format Permit Any Any 00 00 29 94 34 de EAE Any Any 2048 65535 Any Remove Action Permit Source Address Type Any Source MAC Address Source Bitmask Destination Address Type Any Destination MAC Address 000000000000 Destination Bitmask viD VID Bitmask Ethemet Type Ethemet Type Bitmask Packet Format Any z Add Figure 3 44 Configuring MAC ACLs CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800241 4 129 Console config mac acl1 Binding a Port to an Access Control List After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You can assign one access list to any port IP ingress or MAC ingress Command Usage e Each ACL can have up to 60 rules e This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only You can only bind one IP ACL or one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering Command Attributes Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 24 e IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port 3 87 Configuring the Switch MAC Specifi
196. Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 86 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 85 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 86 Authentication Commands 4 Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client
197. G Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip source guard binding command page 4 113 are automatically configured with an infinite lease time Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping are configured by the DHCP server itself static entries include a manually configured lease time If the IP source guard is enabled an inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option will be checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet will be dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe DHCP snooping is disabled page 4 115 IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding the packet will be forwarded Ifthe DHCP snooping is enabled IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding the packet will be forwarded If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured are not yet configure
198. G Nq375R55yRxFvmcGin Q7IphPqyJ3 09MK8LFDfmJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FqX7VGOEbzVDSOI RTMFy 3iUXtvGyQAOVSy6 7Mf c3 1MtgqPRUOYXDiwIlBp5NxgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f8TUAg PNWKV6WOhqmshQdot VzDR1e XKNTZj OuTwWwfjO5kKytdn4MdoTHgrbl1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console 3 64 User Authentication Configuring Public Keys for Clients A user public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the user public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch Field Attributes e Public Key of admin user The public key for the adminstrator or user RSA The first field indicates the size of the public key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus e User Name The user type used for the public key pair e Public Key Type The key type used to generate the user public key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA DSA Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption TFTP Server IP Address
199. Hours 0 13 The number of hours before after UTC e Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC e Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Note The maximum value is 13 00 Current Time Jan 1 00 20 15 2001 Name Dhaka Hours 0 13 6 Minutes 0 59 0 Direction C Before UTC After UTC Figure 3 20 Setting the Time Zone CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 4 51 Console 3 36 Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent A defined set of variables known as managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB that provides
200. Information Query by T Port fa mwan ff al TMAC Address MIP Address sd Query Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Table Dynamic Binding Table Counts 0 none Current Dynamic Binding Table Figure 3 53 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information CLI This example displays all IP source guard bindings Console show ip source guard binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static Console 4 114 VLAN 1 Eth 1 5 3 98 Port Configuration Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T or 1000BASE SFP Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Media Type Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 24 25 Copper Forced SFP Forced SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Member Shows if port is a tr
201. Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 3 8 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment 4 252 sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering 4 256 Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4 260 Multicast VLAN Registration Configures a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts 4 261 residing in other standard or private VLAN groups preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic IGMP Snooping Commands This section describes commands used to configure IGMP snooping on the switch Table 3 9 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 253 ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4 253 ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 254 ip igmp snooping Immedia
202. LACP activity 3 117 Configuring the Switch Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic e The specified threshold applies to each individual port on the switch Note Multicast and unknown unicast storm thresholds can also be set using the CLI see the switchport packet rate command on page 24 7 Command Attributes e Port Port number e Trunk Shows if a port is a trunk member e Type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T or 1000BASE SFP e Protect Status Enables or disables broadcast storm control Default Enabled e Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 64 1 000 000 kilobits per second Default 64 kilobits per second e Trunk Shows if port is a trunk member 7 Port Broadcast Control 8 Trunk Broadcast Control 3 118 Port Configuration Web Click Port Port Broadcast Control or Trunk Broadcast Control Set the th
203. LDP configuration settings for all ports PE 4 229 show Ildp info local device Shows LLDP global and interface specific configuration PE 4 231 settings for this device show Ildp info Shows LLDP global and interface specific configuration PE 4 232 remote device settings for remote devices show Ildp info Shows statistical counters all LLDP enabled interfaces PE 4 233 statistics 4 213 4 Command Line Interface IIdp This command enables LLDP globally on the switch Use the no form to disable LLDP Syntax no Ildp Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config 1ldp Console config IIdp holdtime multiplier This command configures the time to live TTL value sent in LLDP advertisements Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax IIdp holdtime multiplier value no Ildp holdtime multiplier value Calculates the TTL in seconds based on holdtime multiplier refresh interval lt 65536 Range 2 10 Default Setting Holdtime multiplier 4 TTL 4 30 120 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The transmit hold tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to hold onto all information pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit updates in a timely manner 4 214 LLDP Commands 4 Example Console config lldp holdtime multiplier 10 Console config lidp medFastStartCount This c
204. MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web Server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled e Web Server Port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web Secure Server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled e Web Secure Server Port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface e Telnet Server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled e Telnet Server Port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled e POST Result Shows results of the power on self test 3 11 Configuring the Switch Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet 24 port 10 100 1000 2 port mini GBIC Gigabit PoE Switch Manager c System Name Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 1 7 Location Contact System Up Time 0 days 1 hours 38 minutes and 7 10 seconds IGE Connect to textual user interface piece Send mail to technical support Connect to Edge Core Web Site Figure 3 3 System Information CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 Console config snmp server location WC 9 Console config snmp server co
205. Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 140 Interface Commands 4 Example This forces the switch to use the built in RJ 45 port for the combination port 18 Console config interface ethernet 1 18 Console config if media type copper forced Console config if shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if switchport packet rate This command configures broadcast and multicast and unknown unicast storm control Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport broadcast multicast unicast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast multicast unknown unicast broadcast Specifies storm control for broadcast traffic multicast Specifies storm control for multicast traffic unicast Specifies storm control for unknown unicast traffic e rate Threshold level as a rate i e kilobits per second Range 64 1000000 4 141 4 Comma
206. Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNTP server settings SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for the switch Spanning tree settings Interface settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show running config building running config please wait lt stackingDB gt 00 lt stackingDB gt lt stackingMac gt 01_00 16 b6 f 0 3b ec_00 lt stackingMac gt I phymap 00 16 b6 f0 3b ec I SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I clock timezone predefined GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London 4 18 System Management Commands 4 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7
207. NTER to start session User Access Verification Username System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 6 System Management Commands Command Group Function Page Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4 15 System Status Displays system configuration active managers and version information 4 16 Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 22 File Management Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 23 Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port including baud rate and 4 29 console time out Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 39 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 4 45 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP server or manually 4 48 Switch Clustering Configures management of multiple devices via a single IP address 4 53 UPnP Sets Universal Plug and Play parameters used to advertise the switch 4 58 Device Designation Commands This section describes commands used to configure information that uniquely identifies the switch Table 4 7 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 16 snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 63 snmp server location
208. Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group Marker Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select an interface port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Interface Port 2 gt Trunk ID 1 LACPDUs Sent 19 LACPDUs Receive 10 Marker Sent O Marker Receive 0 Marker Unknown Pkts 0 Marker Illegal Pkts 0 Figure 3 59 Displaying LACP Port Counters CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 counters 4 154 Port Channel 1 Eth 1 3 LACPDUs Sent 310 LACPDUs Receive 277 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 3 113 Configuring the Switch Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Table 3 5 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggr
209. OOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol
210. Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Port Configuration DHCP Snooping Binding Information IP Source Guard Port Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Port Status Information Configuring Port Attributes Static Trunk Configuration LACP Port Configuration LACP Aggregation Port Configuration Displaying LACP Port Counters Displaying Local LACP Port Information Displaying Remote LACP Port Information Port Broadcast Control Configuring a Mirror Port Configuring Port Rate Limits Displaying Port Statistics Displaying the Global PoE Status Setting the Switch Power Budget Displaying Port PoE Status Configuring Port PoE Power Mapping Static Addresses Displaying the MAC Dynamic Address Table Setting the Aging Time STA Information STA Global Configuration Displaying STA Port Status Information STA Port Configuration MSTP VLAN Configuration MSTP Port Information MSTP Port Configuration Globally Enabling GVRP Displaying Basic VLAN Information VLAN Current Table Creating Virtual LANs 3 77 3 80 3 82 3 83 3 85 3 87 3 88 3 90 3 91 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 96 3 97 3 98 3 100 3 104 3 106 3 108 3 111 3 113 3 115 3 116 3 119 3 120 3 121 3 125 3 128 3 129 3 130 3 131 3 132 3 134 3 135 3 139 3 144 3 147 3 151 3 152 3 154 3 156 3 160 3 160 3 161 3 163 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 F
211. P MIB Command Attributes e LLDP Enables LLDP globally on the switch Default Enabled e Transmission Interval Configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements Range 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds e Hold Time Multiplier Configures the time to live TTL value sent in LLDP advertisements as shown in the formula below Range 2 10 Default 4 The time to live tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to retain all information pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit updates in a timely manner TTL in seconds is based on refresh interval holdtime multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Delay Interval Configures a delay between the successive transmission of advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables Range 1 8192 seconds Default 2 seconds The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB objects and to increase the probability that multiple rather than single changes are reported in each transmission This attribute must comply with the rule 4 delay interval lt transmission interval e Reinitialization Delay Configures the delay before attempting to re initialize after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down Range 1 10 seconds Default 2 seconds 3 176 Link Layer Discovery Protocol When LLDP is re initialize
212. Panel Display Configuring the Switch Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Main Menu Menu Description Page System 3 11 System Information Provides basic system description including contact 3 11 information Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware version 3 13 numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 14 Configuration IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 15 Jumbo Frames Enables or disables jumbo frames 3 19 File Management 3 20 Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying files 3 21 Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash memory 3 21 Set Start Up Sets the start up file 3 21 Line 3 25 Console Sets console port connection parameters 3 25 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3 27 Log 3 29 Logs Stores and displays error messages 3 32 System Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 29 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging 3 30 process SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server 3 32 Reset Restarts the switch 3 34 SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol 3 35 Configuration Configures SNTP client setting
213. Priv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 e Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required e Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available e Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required 3 47 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete SNMPv3 Remote Users Delete Us Name Group Name Cr mar r amp d Engine ID 8000000002000462b316c54321 V3 Model noAuthNoPriv None Level Authentication Privancy None SNMPv3 Remote Users New SNMPV3 User User Name OOO i Group Name 9 public z Remote IP 192 168 119 o i Security Model vi z Security Level noAuthNoPriv User Authentication Authentication Protocol MD5 Authentication C y Password Data Privacy DES56 z Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Back Add
214. Pv2c RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC DRAFT 2576 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Differentiated Services MIB RFC 3289 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 3636 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1 X Port Access Entity Equipment MIB Private MIB Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation SNMPv2 IP MIB RFC 2011 SNMP Framework MIB RFC 3411 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 3412 SNMP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 3413 SNMP User Based SM MIB RFC 3414 SNMP View Based ACM MIB RFC 3415 SNMP Community MIB RFC 3584 TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2012 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2013 A 3 A Software Specifications A 4 Appendix B Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser or SNMP software Be sure the switch is powered up e Check network cabling between the management station and the switch e Check th
215. Resetting the System SNTP Configuration Setting the Time Zone Enabling the SNMP Agent Configuring SNMP Community Strings Configuring SNMP Trap Managers Setting an Engine ID Setting an Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Configuring SNMPv3 Views User Accounts Authentication Settings HTTPS Settings SSH Host Key Settings SSH User Public Key Settings SSH Server Settings 802 1X Global Information 802 1X Global Configuration 802 1X Port Configuration Displaying 802 1X Port Statistics 3 2 3 12 3 15 xix Figures Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 XX Filtering Management Access Configuring Port Security Selecting ACL Type Configuring Standard IP ACLs Configuring Extended IP ACLs Configuring MAC ACLs Mapping ACLs to Port Ingress Queues DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping Information
216. S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S VLAN ID 2 Type Static Name V2 Status Active Ports Port Channels Console 3 163 Configuring the Switch Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 165 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 166 Command Attributes e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes e Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Port Port identifier e Trunk Trunk identifier e Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio but
217. S UART Loopback Test PASS POE UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TEBE sisrient tiner keines PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Done All Pass Console show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a the Line i e session index number 4 20 eM symbol next to System Management Commands Example 4 Console show users Username Accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 1 VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 168 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s a HTTP Sise 1 19 admin 0 00 00 why empty Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 13 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command Example Console show version Unit 1 Serial Number A622016012 Hardware Version R01 EPLD Version 141 09 Number of Ports 24 Main Power Status Up Redundan
218. S is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Glossary 5 Glossary Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 6 Index not yet updated Numerics 802 1x port authentication 4 98 A acceptable frame type 3 167 4 197 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 3 81 3 82 4
219. SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes e Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled Email Source Address Sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch e Severity Sets the syslog severity threshold level see table on page 3 29 used to trigger alert messages All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Default Level 7 3 32 Basic Configuration SMTP Server List Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Email Destination Address List Specifies the email recipients of alert messages You can specify up to five recipients Use the New Email Destination Address text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Web Click System Log SMTP To add an IP address to the Server IP List type the new IP address in the Server IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Server IP List and then click Remove SMTP Admin Status
220. Spanning Tree 3 145 Configuring the Switch Oper Path Cost The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root which include this port e Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 148 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 148 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated A B Backup Port port R UR A JD B X o 7 y Backup p
221. TP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 49 sntp poll 4 50 show snip 4 51 4 49 4 Command Line Interface snip server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server io7 ip2 ip3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration
222. The MST region name and revision number page 4 178 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e soanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 178 revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 178 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e soanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances 4 178 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 178 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage An MSTI r
223. US server network port GC 4 81 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 81 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 82 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC 4 82 show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 82 radius server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_ip_address host_alias auth port auth_port timeout timeout retransmit retransmit key key index Allows you to specific up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires host_ip_address P address of server host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters auth_port RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Default Setting e auth port 1812 e timeout 5 seconds retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 80 Authent
224. VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if 4 201 4 Command Line Interface Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 3 Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 4 202 show interfaces status vian Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE PE 4 143 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status ofan NE PE 4 145 interface show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name vian name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vian id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 Default VLAN ID 1 VLAN ID iL Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 Ss Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 Ss Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Console 4 202 VL
225. VLAN contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private VLAN group while a secondary or community VLAN contains community ports that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN In all cases the promiscuous ports are designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet while the community ports provide restricted access to local users Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch and multiple community VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch 3 168 VLAN Configuration To configure primary secondary associated groups follow these steps 1 Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu to designate one or more community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the VLAN groups 2 Use the Private VLAN Association menu to map the secondary i e community VLAN s to the primary VLAN 3 Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu to set the port type to promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the primary VLAN or host i e having access restricted to community VLAN members and channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports Then assign any promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a community VLAN Displaying Current Private VLANs
226. a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 clients This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as EdgeView Access to the onboard agent from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models with each model having it s own security levels There are three security models defined SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Users are assigned to groups that are defined by a security model and specified security levels Each group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing which are known as views The switch has a default view all MIB objects and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c The following table shows the securi
227. a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes e WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 through 3 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode WPR z Figure 3 94 Setting the Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 4 234 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 238 Queue mode strict Console 3 190 Class of Service Configuration Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 188
228. able 4 3 show interfaces switchport display description Continued Field Description GVRP Status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 191 Allowed VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 200 Forbidden VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 201 Private VLAN Mode Shows the private VLAN mode as host promiscuous or none Private VLAN Shows the secondary or community VLAN with which this port is associated Host association Private VLAN Mapping Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 4 4 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Con
229. abling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port 3 157 Configuring the Switch Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging EI tagged frames E E E VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware a tagged untagged a Sa frames frames S VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID
230. ach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3 2005 formerly IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 8 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this inf
231. ached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts e Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 e Data Bits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits e Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Default None 3 25 Configuring the Switch Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 or 38400 baud Default 9600 bps Stop Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables pa
232. acl Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules e Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to 3 82 Client Security indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Permit 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove Action Permit Address Type iP z IP Address j iees2160 Subnet Mask 255 255 2400 Add Figure 3 42 Configuring Standard IP ACLs CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1
233. adly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype 4 154 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Console show lacp internal Channel group 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 6 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State e Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state e Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or
234. affic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information on page 3 172 e Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 132 e VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database e Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 157 e Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs e GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering 3 14 Basic Configuration Web Click System Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Pot Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP F Enabled Figure 3 5 Displaying Bridge Extension Configura
235. al switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config 4 190 VLAN Commands 4 show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 160 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 14 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max Support VLAN Numbers 255 Max Support VLAN ID 4094 Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No Traffic Classes Enabled Global GVRP Status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if 4 191 4 Command Line Interface show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 19 port channel channel id Range 1 12 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration
236. alization Delay 0 10 2 Jseconds Notification Interval 0 3600 Po lescoad MED Fast Start Count E counts Note The Transmission Interval must be greater than or equal to 4 times delay interval Figure 3 90 LLDP Configuration 3 177 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the setting of the transmit interval to 60 seconds the transmit delay to 10 seconds the hold time to 10 seconds the reinitialization delay to 10 seconds and the notification interval to 30 seconds Console config lldp refresh interval 60 4 216 Console config lldp holdtime multiplier 10 4 214 Console config lldp tx delay 10 4 217 Console config lldp reinit delay 10 4 217 Console config lldp notification interval 30 4 215 Console config lldp medFastStartCount 6 4 215 Console config Configuring LLDP Interface Attributes Use the LLDP Port Trunk Configuration to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces including whether messages are transmitted received or both transmitted and received whether SNMP notifications are sent and the type of information advertised Command Attributes e Admin Status Enables LLDP message transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data Units Options Tx only Rx only TxRx Disabled Default TxRx e SNMP Notification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP and LLDP MED changes Default Enabled This option sends out SNMP t
237. ame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging Glossary 2 Glossary IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to GMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can regis
238. amically learned from DHCP snooping the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port except for DHCP packets Command Attributes e Filter Type Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Default None e None Disables IP source guard filtering on the port 3 95 Configuring the Switch e SIP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table SIP MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Web Click IP Source Guard Port Configuration Set the required filtering type for each port and click Apply a IP Source Guard Port Configuration Port Filter Type 1 None v 2 None bs 3 None x 4 None v 5 None the 6 None None v 8 None v X Figure 3 51 IP Source Guard Port Configuration CLI This example sets IP source guard filter mode on port 5 to check both the source IP and MAC address for ingress packets against the binding table Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip 4 111 Console config if end Console show ip source guard 4 114 Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source
239. and Line Interface on page 44 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 44 9 Basic Configuration 2 Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 22 4 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet SSH sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above Netscape 6 2 or above or Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level
240. and configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types 4 197 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 197 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage 4 198 Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs
241. and to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST 4 187 4 Command Line Interface e For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 141 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 145 Example Console show spanning tree Spanning Tree Information Spanning Tree Mode RSTP Spanning Tree Enabled Disabled Enabled Instance 0 VLANs Configuration 1 4094 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max Hops 20 Remaining Hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0013F7123456 Current Root Port 25 Current Root Cost 5000 Number of Topology Changes 3 Last Topology Change Time sec 5 Transmission Limit 3 Path Cost Method Long Eth 1 1 information Admin Status Enabled Role Designate State Forwarding Admin Path Cost 0 Oper Path Cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated Cost 5000 Designated Port 128 1 Designated Root 32768 0013F7123456 Designated Bridge 32768 0016B6F03BEC Fast Forwarding Enabled Forward Transitions si Admin Edge Port Enabled Oper Edge Port Enabled Admin Link Type Auto Oper Link Type Point to point Spanning Tree Status Enabled 4 188 VLAN Commands 4
242. ands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Static Multicast Routing Commands Multicast VLAN Registration Commands show mvr display description show mvr interface display description show mvr members display description IP Interface Commands Troubleshooting Chart Tables 4 202 4 203 4 208 4 212 4 234 4 234 4 237 4 240 4 241 4 243 4 252 4 252 4 256 4 260 4 261 4 265 4 266 4 267 4 268 xvii Tables xviii Figures Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Home Page Panel Display System Information Switch Information Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration Manual IP Configuration DHCP IP Configuration Enabling Jumbo Frames Copy Firmware Setting the Startup Code Deleting Files Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup Setting the Startup Configuration Settings Configuring the Console Port Configuring the Telnet Interface System Logs Remote Logs Displaying Logs Enabling and Configuring SMTP
243. ange 1 8 4 186 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_ia e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst instance_id comm
244. annel Command Usage The system description is taken from the sysDescr object in RFC 3418 which includes the full name and version identification of the system s hardware type software operating system and networking software Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp basic tlv system description Console config if IIdp basic tlv system name This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the system name Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp basic tlv system name Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The system name is taken from the sysName object in RFC 3418 which contains the system s administratively assigned name and is in turn based on the hostname command page 56 Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp basic tlv system name Console config if 4 222 LLDP Commands 4 Ildp dot1 tlv proto ident This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the supported protocols Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp doti tlv proto ident Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises the protocols that are accessible through this interface Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot1 tlv protocol iden
245. are implemented as follows Ifthe global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows 4 116 If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table If the DHCP packet is from client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled as specified by the ip dhcp snooping verify mac address command page 4 119 However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped Ifa DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in
246. arity None Stopbits 1 VTY Configuration Password Threshold 3 times Interactive Timeout 600 sec Login Timeout 300 sec Console 4 38 System Management Commands 4 Event Logging Commands This section describes commands used to configure event logging on the switch Table 4 13 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page ogging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC 4 40 severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC 4 41 messages ogging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4 41 logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on GC 4 42 severity clearlog Clears messages fromthe logging buffer PE 442 show logging Displaysthestateofloging JE 4 43 show log Displays log messages PE 4 44 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to a logging process The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory or sent to remote syslog servers You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory You can use the logging trap command to control the type of error messages that are sent t
247. artial keyword up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters 4 3 4 Command Line Interface Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line or VLAN Database You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group Access groups access list Access lists bridge ext Bridge extension information calendar Date and time information class map Displays class maps cluster Display cluster dot1x 802 1x content garp GARP properties gvrp GVRP interface information history History information interfaces Interface information ip IP information lacp LACP statistics line TTY line information lldp LLDP log Login records logging Logging setting mac MAC access list mac address table Configuration of the address table management Show management information map Maps priority mvr Show mvr interface information policy map Display
248. ast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded Recewed Unknown 0 Packets Packets Received Errors O Transmit Octets i 168087 Transmit Multicast Transmit Unicast Packets OlPackets 2420 Transmit Broadcast a7 Transmit Discarded oD Packets Packets Transmit Errors o gt zi Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions _ 0 FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Single Collision Frames mene MAC Transmit 0 rrors Multiple Collision Frames O Carrier Sense Errors a SGE Test Errors 0 Frames Too Long oO Deferred Transmissions ena Mac Receive 0 rrors RMON Statistics Drop Events OlJabbers o Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames 47165 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 01512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 01024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh x Figure 3 65 Displaying Port Statistics 3 125 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 144 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231
249. ast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN You can also configure a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing in other standard or private VLAN groups preserving security and data isolation Multicast VLAN Registration on page 3 211 3 202 Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query page 3 204 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic When using IGMPv3 snooping service requests from IGMP Version 1 2 or 3 hosts are all forwarded to the upstream router as IGMPv3 reports The primary enhancement provided by IGMPv3 snooping is in keeping track of information about the specific multicast sources which downstream IGMPv3 hosts have requested or refused The switch maintains information about both multicast groups and channels where a group indicates a multicast flow for which the hosts have not requested a specific source the only option for IGMPv1 and v2 hosts unless statically configured on the switch and a channel indicates a flow for which the hosts have requested service from a specific source Only IGMPv3 hosts can request service from a specific multicast source When downst
250. at you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled e Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway e Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected e If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag e Ifyou cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot connect using Secure Shell e Ifyou cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station e Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client e Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password e Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authent
251. atch Class Settings Class Name class Remove ACL List none z Add P DSCP 0 63 au IP Precedence 0 7 777 Add VLAN 1 409 D Add Figure 3 98 Configuring Class Maps CLI This example creates a class map call rd class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap 3 197 Configuring the Switch Creating QoS Policies This function creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces Command Usage To configure a Policy Map follow these steps Create a Class Map as described on 3 195 Open the Policy Map page and click Add Policy When the Policy Configuration page opens fill in the Policy Name field and click Add When the Policy Rule Settings page opens select a class name from the scroll down list Class Name field Configure a policy for traffic that matches criteria defined in this class by setting the quality of service that an IP packet will receive in the Action field defining the maximum throughput and burst rate in the Meter field and the action that results from a policy violation in the Exceed field Then finally click Add to register the new policy A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the Service Policy Settings page 3 15
252. ath between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 148 Configuring the Switch Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics 2226 4222 24 6224 Ao SMC ee ECEN CEA Li IIS F unk Up f Link Down 24 port 10 100 1000 2 port mini GBIC Gigabit PoE Switch Manager m Name ct ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 67 Location mtact m Up Time 0 days 0 hours 32 minutes and 23 74 seconds Te WEI Connect to textual user interface Send mail to technic Connect to Connect to SM C Web Page Apply Revert Help
253. ation Source Destination Contr Action pestis e ing a Apian Subnet TOS Precedence DSOP Protocol gey Port poaa Port ety Code Remove saat weet Mask Bitmask Bitmask Bitmask Pent 107110 255 255 MS 255 lAny Any Any Any Any E Any Any Ary Any Ary Any Remove Port 192 168 1 0255 255 255 255 lAny Any Any Any Any E Any lany E p555 Any Any Remove Perma S 1 16 Precedence 0 4 C OSCR O54 Figure 3 43 Configuring Extended IP ACLs CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 125 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any dport 80 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any tcp control code 2 2 Console config std acl 3 85 Configuring the Switch Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain permit rules deny rules or a combination of both Default Permit rules Source Destination Address Type Use
254. ation mismatches on a port Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lldp medtlv network policy Console config if show Ildp config This command shows LLDP configuration settings for all ports Syntax show Ildp config detail interface e detail Shows configuration summary e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 229 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show lldp config LLDP Global i j LLDP Enable Yes LLDP Transmit interval 2 30 LLDP Hold Time Multiplier 4 LLDP Delay Interval 22 LLDP Reinit Delay 2 LLDP Notification Interval 5 LLDP Port Configuration Port AdminStatus NotificationEnabled BE ORAS TEE nes E E Eth 1 1 Tx Rx True Eth 1 2 Tx Rx True Tx Rx True Eth 1 3 switch show lldp config detail ethernet 1 1 LLDP Port Configuration Detail Port Eth 1 1 Admin Status Tx Rx Notification Enabled True Basic TLVs Advertised port description system name system description system capabilities management ip address 802 1 specific TLVs Advertised port vid yvlan name proto vlan proto ident 802 3 specific TLVs Advertised mac phy poe link agg max frame Console 4 230
255. ault 3 16 4 269 GVRP Index 1 Index global setting 3 160 4 190 interface configuration 3 167 4 191 H hardware version displaying 3 13 4 21 HTTPS 3 58 4 86 HTTPS secure server 3 58 4 86 TACACS client 3 55 4 83 TACACS server 3 55 4 83 logon authentication sequence 3 56 4 78 4 79 l IEEE 802 1D 3 136 4 171 IEEE 802 1s 4 171 IEEE 802 1w 3 136 4 171 IEEE 802 1x 4 98 IGMP groups displaying 3 209 4 256 Layer 2 3 203 4 252 query 3 203 4 257 query Layer 2 3 204 4 256 snooping 3 203 4 253 snooping configuring 3 204 3 206 4 252 ingress filtering 3 167 4 198 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 17 4 58 4 59 4 268 setting 2 4 3 15 3 19 4 58 4 59 4 268 IP precedence enabling 3 192 J jumbo frame 4 22 L link type STA 3 147 3 150 4 184 LLDP display device information 3 181 3 182 3 183 logging syslog traps 4 42 to syslog servers 4 41 log in Web interface 3 2 logon authentication 3 54 4 75 RADIUS client 3 55 4 80 RADIUS server 3 55 4 80 Index 2 M main menu 3 4 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 media type 3 103 mirror port configuring 3 120 4 157 MSTP 4 171 global settings 3 151 4 169 interface settings 4 170 multicast filtering 3 202 3 211 3 219 4 252 multicast groups 3 209 4 256 displaying 4 256 static 3 209 4 253 4 256 multicast services configuring 3 210 3 212 3 214 3 216 4 253 displaying 3 209 4 256 multicast storm threshold 4 141 mu
256. authentication retries ip ssh server key size delete public key ip ssh crypto host key generate ip ssh crypto zeroize ip ssh save host key show ip ssh show ssh show public key 802 1X Port Authentication dot1x system auth control dot1x default dot1x max req dot1x port control 4 73 4 74 4 75 4 75 4 76 4 77 4 78 4 78 4 79 4 80 4 80 4 81 4 81 4 82 4 82 4 82 4 83 4 83 4 84 4 84 4 85 4 85 4 85 4 86 4 86 4 87 4 88 4 88 4 89 4 91 4 92 4 93 4 93 4 94 4 94 4 95 4 95 4 96 4 96 4 97 4 98 4 99 4 99 4 99 4 100 dot1x operation mode dot1x re authenticate dot1x re authentication dot1x timeout quiet period dot1x timeout re authperiod dot1x timeout tx period show dot1x Management IP Filter Commands management show management Client Security Commands Port Security Commands port security IP Source Guard Commands ip source guard ip source guard binding show ip source guard show ip source guard binding DHCP Snooping Commands ip dhcp snooping ip dhcp snooping vlan ip dhcp snooping trust ip dhcp snooping verify mac address ip dhcp snooping information option ip dhcp snooping information policy show ip dhcp snooping show ip dhcp snooping binding Access Control List Commands IP ACLs access list ip permit deny Standard ACL permit deny Extended ACL show ip access list ip access group show ip access group MAC ACLs access list mac permit deny MAC ACL show mac access list mac access group show mac
257. authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server The encryption methods used for the authentication process must also be configured or negotiated between the authentication server and logon client This switch can pass authentication messages between the server and client that have been encrypted using MD5 Message Digest 5 TLS Transport Layer Security or TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked Command Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS serve
258. aximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated Command Attributes HTTPS e HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 3 59 Configuring the Switch Copy HTTPS Certificate TFTP Server IP Address Specifies the TFTP Server where the authorized certificate will be saved Source Certificate File Name File name for the certificate Source Private File Name Private key file name Private Password Password for the private key Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply To replace the default secure site certificate enter the TFTP Server IP Address the Source Certificate File Name the Source Private File Name and the Private Password then click Copy Certificate HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status M E
259. c Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry e Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 202 Default VLAN ID 1 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Ethl 1 S Ethl 2 S Ethl 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Ethl 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Console Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading
260. c address table aging time 4 169 Spanning Tree Commands 4 169 spanning tree 4 170 spanning tree mode 4 171 spanning tree forward time 4 172 Contents spanning tree hello time 4 173 spanning tree max age 4 173 spanning tree priority 4 174 spanning tree pathcost method 4 175 spanning tree transmission limit 4 175 spanning tree mst configuration 4 176 mst vlan 4 176 mst priority 4 177 name 4 178 revision 4 178 max hops 4 179 spanning tree spanning disabled 4 179 spanning tree cost 4 180 spanning tree port priority 4 181 spanning tree edge port 4 182 spanning tree portfast 4 183 spanning tree link type 4 184 spanning tree mst cost 4 185 spanning tree mst port priority 4 186 spanning tree protocol migration 4 186 show spanning tree 4 187 show spanning tree mst configuration 4 189 VLAN Commands 4 189 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 190 bridge ext gvrp 4 190 show bridge ext 4 191 switchport gvrp 4 191 show gvrp configuration 4 192 garp timer 4 192 show garp timer 4 193 Editing VLAN Groups 4 194 vlan database 4 194 vian 4 195 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4 196 interface vlan 4 196 switchport mode 4 197 switchport acceptable frame types 4 197 switchport ingress filtering 4 198 switchport native vlan 4 199 switchport allowed vlan 4 200 switchport forbidden vlan 4 201 Displaying VLAN Information 4 202 show vlan 4 202 Configuring Private VLANs 4 203 private vlan 4 204 xi Contents xii private vlan association swi
261. cal layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask 4 129 4 Command Line Interface no permit deny untagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address host A specific MAC address e source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask address bitmask25 Bit
262. cate interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 24 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The re authentication process verifies the connected client s user ID and password on the RADIUS server During re authentication the client remains connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software Only if re authentication fails is the port blocked Example Console dotix re authenticate Console 4 101 4 Command Line Interface dot1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage e The re authentication process verifies the connected client s user ID and password on the RADIUS server During re authentication the client remains connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software Only if re authentication fails is the port blocked The connected client is re authenticated after the interval specified by the dot1x timeout re authperiod command The default is 3600 seconds Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotix re authentication Console config if Related Commands dot1x timeout re authperiod 4 103 dot1x timeout quiet period This com
263. ccess group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group acl_name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 131 4 131 4 Command Line Interface show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 in Console Related Commands mac access group 4 131 ACL Information Table 4 1 ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Shows all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 132 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 133 show access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 IP extended access list bob
264. ce guard binding table with this command e Static bindings are processed as follows lf there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address a new entry is added to binding table using the type of static IP source guard binding 4 113 4 Command Line Interface If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of entry is static IP source guard binding then the new entry will replace the old one If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source guard binding Example This example configures a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Related Command ip source guard 4 111 ip dhcp snooping 4 115 ip dhcp snooping vlan 4 117 show ip source guard This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip source guard Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED show ip source guard binding This command shows the source guard binding table Syntax show ip source guard binding dhcp snooping static dhcp snooping Shows dyna
265. ces attached to the MVR Type Shows the MVR port type Status Shows the MVR status and interface status e Ifa source port has been added to an MVR VLAN via manual configuration and MVR is enabled its status is Active If a receiver port has been added an MVR VLAN via dynamic configuration and MVR is enabled its status is Active e Interface status shows UP if there is a valid link Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled 4 266 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 show mvr members This command shows information about the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Syntax show mvr members ip address e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 jjp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting Displays status for all assigned multicast groups Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr members MVR Group IP Status Members 225 0 0 1 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1 2 s 225 20 052 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 3 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 6 INACTIVE None 225 020 7 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 9 INACTIVE None 2
266. cess Control List DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Displaying DHCP Snooping Binding Information IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Port Configuration Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status Configuring Interface Connections Creating Trunk Groups Statically Configuring a Trunk Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Configuring LACP Parameters Displaying LACP Port Counters Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Configuring Port Mirroring Configuring Rate Limits Rate Limit Configuration Showing Port Statistics Power over Ethernet Settings Switch Power Status Setting a Switch Power Budget Displaying Port Power Status Configuring Port PoE Power Address Table Settings Setting Static Addresses Displaying the Address Table Changing the Aging Time Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Displaying Global Settings Configuring Global Settings Displaying Interface Settings Configuring Interface Settings Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP Contents 3 82 3 83 3 86 3 87 3 88 3 90 3 90 3 91 3 93 3 94 3 95 3 95 3 96 3 98 3 99 3 99 3 102 3 105 3 106 3 107 3 110 3 113 3 114 3 116
267. cess Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive e Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user name 4 For other methods of controlling client access see Client Security on page 7 1 3 54 User Authentication Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account specify a user name select the user s access level then enter a password and confirm it Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the Account List To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new password confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account User Name bo SOt S Y lt lt Add Access Level Noma gt Remove Password pe Confirm Password pe admin Privileged guest Normal Change Password User Name isd iNew Password i Confirm Password Change Figure 3 1 User Accounts CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 76 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names
268. ch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering Class Map Configuration Creates a DiffServ class map for a specified traffic type e Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation e Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance e Policy Map Configuration Creates a DiffServ policy map for multiple interfaces e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the fo
269. characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vian id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 sort Sort by address vlan or interface 4 167 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting None Co
270. ches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station There can be up to 36 Member switches in one cluster Note Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection to the Commander From the Commander CLI prompt use the rcommand command see page 4 56 to connect to the Member switch Cluster Configuration To create a switch cluster first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch the default is enabled then set the switch as a Cluster Commander Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with the network IP subnet Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander Command Attributes e Cluster Status Enables clustering on the switch Default Enabled e Cluster Commander Enables the switch as a cluster Commander Default Disabled e Role Indicates the current role of the switch in the cluster either Commander Member or Candidate Default Candidate e Cluster IP Pool An internal IP address pool that is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches in the cluster Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10 x x member ID Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36 Note that you cannot change the cluster IP
271. chport private vlan host association Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN Use the no form to remove this association Syntax switchport private vlan host association secondary vian id no switchport private vian host association secondary vlan id ID of secondary i e community VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage All ports assigned to a secondary i e community VLAN can pass traffic between group members but must communicate with resources outside of the group via promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN Example Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport private vlan host association 3 Console config if 4 206 VLAN Commands 4 switchport private vian mapping Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN Use the no form to remove this mapping Syntax switchport private vian mapping primary vian id no switchport private vian mapping primary vian id D of primary VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN and with the group members within any associated secondary VLANs Example Console config inter
272. client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys Public Key Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys 4 90 Authentication Commands 4 stored on the switch can access it The following exchanges take place during this process Authenticating SSH v1 5 Clients a The client sends its RSA public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256 bit string as a challenge encrypts this string with the user s public key and sends it to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string computes the MD5 checksum and sends the checksum back to the switch e The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original string it sent If the two checksums match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Authenticating SSH v2 Clients a The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable b If the specified algorithm is supported by the
273. configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Unit Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks e Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 8 e Port Port identifier Range 1 24 Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk1 Unit Port3 Trunk1 Unit Port4 lt lt Add Trunk 1 8 Remove Port fx Figure 3 56 Static Trunk Configuration 3 106 Port Configuration CLI This example creates trunk 1 with ports 3 and 4 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 1 4 135 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 135 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 143 Information of Trunk 1 Basic Information Console config if channel group 1 4 148 Port Type 1000T Mac Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B EF
274. configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values t
275. cribed under Displaying Global Settings page 3 138 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 145 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID x Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Bridge ID 32768 1 0030F 1D473A0 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time R Configuration Changes 1 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d O h 0 min 1 Priority 0 61440 32768 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST Instance VLAN 1 Remove MST ID 0 4094 VLAN ID Add Figure 3 2 MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 152 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 1 4 187 Spanning tree information Spanning Tree Mode MSTP Spanning Tree Enabled Disabled Enabled Instance 1 VLANs Configuration 1 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec A Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max Hops 20 Remaining Hops 20 Designated Root 32768 1 001
276. ction to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 e IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 25 seconds Default 10 3 204 Multicast Filtering IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 3 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Status M Enabled Act as IGMP Querier I Enabled GMP Query Count 2 10 2 GMP Query Interval 60 125 125 seconds IGMP Report Delay 5 25 ho seconds IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds GMP Version 1 2 2 Figure 3 101 Configuring
277. cy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command page 4 66 Example Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth write daily Console config 22 No view is defined 23 Maps to the defaultview 4 71 4 Command Line Interface show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and read write access and SNMPv2c read only access and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp group Group Name r amp d Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View daily Notify View none Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 4 24 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Name of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version 4 72 SNMP Comma
278. d 2 F Enabled Discarding 128 J Auto gt F Enabled I Enabled I Enabled 3 F Enabled Discarding 128 o Auto z F Enabled T Enabled I Enabled 4 F Enabled Discarding 128 o Auto Z F Enabled F Enabled I Enabled 5 F Enabled Discarding 128 q Auto F Enabled Enabled I Enabled 6 F Enabled Discarding 128 0 Auto zj F Enabled I Enabled I Enabled F Enabled Discarding o 50 Auto J enabled F Enabled F Enabled E Figure 3 76 STA Port Configuration CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 135 Console config if no no spanning tree spanning disabled 4 179 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 181 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 180 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 184 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 182 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 4 186 Console config if Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances
279. d To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands 4 Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a p
280. d the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port except for DHCP packets Client Security Commands 4 Example This example maps enables IP source guard on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip Console config if Related Command ip source guard binding 4 113 ip dhcp snooping 4 115 ip dhcp snooping vian 4 117 ip source guard binding This command adds a static address to the source guard binding table Use the no form to remove a static entry Syntax ip source guard mac adaress vlan vian id ip address interface ethernet unit port no ip source guard mac address vlan vian id mac adaress A valid unicast MAC address e vian id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 jp address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C e unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 Default Setting No configured entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero by the show ip source guard command page 4 114 e When source guard is enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping or static addresses configured in the sour
281. d Commands spanning tree cost 4 180 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast 4 182 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 183 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning t
282. d Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises the name of all VLANs to which this interface has been assigned See switchport allowed vlan on page 4 200 and protocol vian protocol group vian on page 4 209 Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot1l tlv vlan name Console config if 4 224 LLDP Commands 4 IIdp dot3 tlv link agg This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its link aggregation capabilities Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot3 tlv link agg Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises link aggregation capabilities aggregation status of the link and the 802 3 aggregated port identifier if this interface is currently a link aggregation member Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot3 tlv link agg Console config if IIdp dot3 tlv mac phy This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its MAC and physical layer capabilities Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot3 tlv mac phy Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises MAC PHY configuration status which includes information about auto negotiation capabilities port speed and duplex mode Exa
283. d Usage e This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over port priority e When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 175 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 4 181 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree e Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Relate
284. d in the transmission An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any IldpRemTablesChange notification events missed due to throttling or transmission loss Example Console config lldp notification interval 30 Console config Ildp refresh interval This command configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lidp refresh interval lt seconds gt no Ildp refresh interval seconds Specifies the periodic interval at which LLDP advertisements are sent Range 5 32768 seconds Default Setting 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This attribute must comply with the following rule refresh interval holdtime multiplier lt 65536 Example Console config lldp refresh interval 60 Console config 4 216 LLDP Commands 4 lldp reinit delay This command configures the delay before attempting to re initialize after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lidp reinit delay lt seconds gt no Ildp reinit delay seconds Specifies the delay before attempting to re initialize LLDP Range 1 10 seconds Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When LLDP is re initialized on a port all information in the remote systems LLDP
285. d is used this switch can detect 802 3af compliant devices and the more recent 802 3af non compliant devices that also reflect the test voltages back to the switch It cannot detect other legacy devices that do not reflect back the test voltages e For legacy devices to be supported by this switch they must be able to accept power over the data pairs connected to the 1000BASE T ports 4 161 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config power inline compatible Console config end Console show power inline status Unit 1 Compatible mode Enabled Interface Admin Oper Power mWatt Power used Priority Eth 1 1 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 2 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 3 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 4 enable off 15400 0 low Eth 1 5 enable off 15400 0 low power inline This command instructs the switch to automatically detect if a PoE compliant device is connected to the specified port and turn power on or off accordingly Use the no form to turn off power for a port Syntax no power inline Default Setting Detection is enabled for PoE compliant devices Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage When detection is enabled for PoE compliant devices power is automatically supplied when a device is detected on the port providing that the power demanded does not exceed switch s power budget Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if power inline Console c
286. d on a port all information in the remote systems LLDP MIB associated with this port is deleted Notification Interval Configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP notifications about LLDP MIB changes Range 5 3600 seconds Default 5 seconds This parameter only applies to SNMP applications which use data stored in the LLDP MIB for network monitoring or management Information about changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP notifications is not transmitted Only state changes that exist at the time of a notification are included in the transmission An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of IldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any lidpRemTablesChange notification events missed due to throttling or transmission loss MED Fast Start Count Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism Range 1 10 packets Default 4 packets The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port LLDP MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service Web Click LLDP Configuration LLDP Configuration LLDP Enabled Transmission Interval 5 32768 eo seconds Hold time Multiplier 2 10 fio Delay Interval 0 8192 10 seconds Reiniti
287. d to all ports in the VLAN for several seconds when first received If a multicast router port exists on the VLAN the traffic will be filtered by subjecting it to IGMP snooping If no router port exists on the VLAN or the multicast filtering table is already full the switch will continue flooding the traffic into the VLAN e IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes e IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled e Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Disabled e IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes a
288. d5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining shai Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users are displayed When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus 4 97 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 65537 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836
289. database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config 4 41 4 Command Line Interface logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 40 Default Setting e Disabled e Level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved e Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear log This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console 4 42 System Management Commands Related Commands show log 4 44 show logging This c
290. ddresses that receive the syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List 3 30 Basic Configuration Web Click System Log Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs F Enabled Logging Facility 16 23 Logging Trap 0 7 6 Host IP Address Current New Host IP List none lt lt Add eae Host IP Address Remove Figure 3 15 Remote Logs CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console config logging host 192 168 1 15 4 41 Console config logging facility 23 4 41 Console config logging trap 4 4 42 Console config end Console show logging trap 4 43 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Enabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server ip address 192 168 1 15 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 Console 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 31 Configuring the Switch Displaying Log Messages The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048
291. de Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code e Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code e Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number A62201 6012 Number of Ports 24 Hardware Version R01 internal Power Status Active Management Software EPLD Version 11 09 Loader Version f 0 2 4 Boot ROM Version fi 0 2 6 Operation Code Version 1 0 0 5 Role Master Figure 3 4 Switch Information Configuring the Switch CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 21 Unit 1 Serial Number A622016012 Hardware Version R01 EPLD Version 11 09 Number of Ports 24 Main Power Status Up Redundant Power Status Not present Agent Master Unit ID il Loader Version 1 0 2 4 Boot ROM Version 10 26 Operation Code Version 1 0 0 5 Console Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes e Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol e Tr
292. de image or a switch configuration to or from flash memory or PE 4 24 a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 26 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 27 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 28 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4 28 4 23 4 Command Line Interface copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key e file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server https certificate Keyword that allows you to copy an HTTPS secure site certificate from an TFTP server to the switch public key Keyword
293. ding RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as EdgeView or HP OpenView Table 3 7 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Received Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an u
294. display description Field Description MVR Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR running status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied Running status is true as long as MVR Status is enabled and the specified MVR VLAN exists MVR multicast vlan Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic MVR Max Multicast Shows the maximum number of multicast groups which can assigned to the Groups MVR VLAN MVR Current multicast Shows the number of multicast groups currently assigned to the MVR VLAN groups 4 265 4 Command Line Interface show mvr interface This command shows information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Syntax show mvr interface interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Displays status for all attached interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface Port Type Status Immediate Leave eth1 1 SOURCE ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 2 RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 5 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable eth1 6 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable eth1 7 RECEIVER INACTIVE DOWN Disable Console Table 4 1 show mvr interface display description Field Description Port Shows interfa
295. display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Field Attributes e Type Shows the MVR port type e Oper Status Shows the link status MVR Status Shows the MVR status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled e Trunk Member29 Shows if port is a trunk member Port Information only Web Click MVR Port or Trunk Information a Port Information Port Type Oper Status MVR Status Immediate Leave Trunk Member 1 Source Up Active Disabled 2 Receiver Up Active Disabled 3 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 4 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 5 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 6 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 7 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 8 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 9 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 10 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled v Figure 3 108 MVR Port Information CLI This example shows information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface 4 266 Port Type Status Immediate Leave eth1 1 SOURCE ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 2 RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable Console 20 Port Information only 3 214 Multicast VLAN Regi
296. ds login 4 30 password thresh 4 33 timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax timeout login response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 600 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting 4 32 System Management Commands 4 Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise
297. e GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 4 6 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 4 190 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 4 191 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 191 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 201 show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE PE 4 192 garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 4 192 show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE PE 4 193 bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the loc
298. e 4 10 authentication enable 4 79 4 77 4 Command Line Interface Authentication Sequence Three authentication methods can be specified to authenticate users logging into the system for management access The commands in this section can be used to define the authentication method and sequence Table 4 29 Authentication Sequence for command mode change Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4 78 authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence GC 4 79 authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must b
299. e Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp transmit and receive Console config if IIdp notification This command enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP changes Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no Ildp notification Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 218 LLDP Commands 4 Command Usage e This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at the interval specified by the Ildp notification interval command page 4 215 Trap notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB IEEE 802 1AB or vendor specific LLDP EXT DOT1 and LLDP EXT DOT3 MIBs SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp server host command page 4 64 e Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP notifications is not transmitted Only state changes that exist at the time of a trap notification are included in the transmission An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of IldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any IldpRemTablesChange notification events missed due to throttling or transmission loss Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp notification Console config if IIdp mednotification This command enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP MED changes Use the
300. e IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 135 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 4 268 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 4 269 Console config Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN fi IP Address Mode DHCP IP Address fiszisais4 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 92168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 DHCP IP Configuration Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection to the switch and enter show ip interface to determine the new address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 135 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 268 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 270 Console show ip interfac
301. e 4 271 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 Address Mode DHCP Console 3 17 Configuring the Switch Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 270 Console Basic Configuration Enabling Jumbo Frames The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields Command Usage To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for
302. e Force port type selected for combination ports 0 4 140 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 141 switchport packet rate Configures broadcast and multicast and unknown unicast storm IC 4 141 control thresholds clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 142 show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE PE 4 143 show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE PE 4 144 counters show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational status of an NE PE 4 145 switchport interface interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting None 4 135 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters Default Set
303. e ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets e A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs See snmp server host on page 4 64 The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it e Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID In other words the value 0123456789 is equivalent to 0123456789 followed by 16 zeroes for a local engine ID e A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local enginelD is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 4 73 Example Console config snmp server engineID local 12345 Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 64 show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID Console show snmp engine id L
304. e Switch This example displays detailed information for a specific port on the local switch Console show lldp info local device detail ethernet 1 1 4 231 LLDP Port Information Detail Port Eth 1 1 Port Type MAC Address Port ID 00 01 02 03 04 06 Port Desc Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 Console Displaying LLDP Remote Port Information Use the LLDP Remote Port Trunk Information screen to display information about devices connected directly to the switch s ports which are advertising information through LLDP Web Click LLDP Remote Port Trunk Information LLDP Port Remote Device Information Local Port Chassis ID Pot ID Port Name System Name 4 00 01 02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03 04 06 Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 Figure 3 1 LLDP Remote Port Information CLI This example displays LLDP information for remote devices attached to this switch which are advertising information through LLDP Console show lldp info remote device 4 232 LLDP Remote Devices Information Interface ChassisId PortId SysName OERE P eshdan enan Sne eg a Eth 1 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03 04 06 Console 3 182 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Displaying LLDP Remote Information Details Use the LLDP Remote Information Details screen to display detailed information about an LLDP enabled device connected to a specific port on the local switch Web Click LLDP Remote Informat
305. e This option only applies to an interface configured as an MVR receiver see the mvr interface command on page 4 263 Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a 4 264 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port Example The following enables immediate leave on a receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mvr immediate Console config if show mvr This command shows information about the global MVR configuration settings Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows the global MVR settings Console show mvr MVR Status enable MVR running status TRUE MVR multicast vlan 1 MVR Max Multicast Groups 255 MVR Current multicast groups 1 Console Table 4 8 show mvr
306. e changes to the view settings To delete a view check the box next to the view name then click Delete SNMP v3 Views Name OID Subtrees Actions DID Subtrees E defhultview Edit O SNMPv3 Views View r writeaccess View OID Subtrees Edit OID Subtrees View readaccess SNMPv3 View Edit OID Subtree Type 11 3 6 1 2 Included Back View Name Current New OID Subtree lt lt Add Bsa Ee Included Back Figure 3 29 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 3 52 Simple Network Management Protocol CLI Use the snmp server view command to configure a new view This example view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the wildcard mask selects all index entries VS OD 2s PE E Console config exit Console show snmp vi View Name ifEntry a Subtree OID 1 3 6 View Type included Storage Type nonvo Row Status active View Name readacces Subtree OID 1 3 6 View Type included Storage Type nonvo Row Status active View Name defaultvi Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvol Row Status active Console Console config snmp server view ifEntry a included ew AEN E a le atile Ss 2 atile ew atile 3 53 Configuring the Switch User Authentication You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote auth
307. e configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config Console config authentication login radius 4 78 Authentication Commands 4 Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 76 authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 10 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only e tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS
308. e is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN e Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vlan protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group ia group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console 4 210 VLAN Commands 4 show protocol vian protocol group vid This command shows the VLANs mapped to a protocol group Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show protocol vlan protocol group vid Console 4 211 4 Command Line Interface LLDP Commands Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domai
309. east one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled e Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled e Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 61 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 66 3 Specify the target host that will
310. eates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 128 permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source and MAC ACL 4 129 destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4 131 mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 131 show mac access group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 132 access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None 4 128 Access Control List Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl1 Related Commands permit deny 4 129 mac access group 4 131 show mac access list 4 131 permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physi
311. ecify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 inform retries 10 timeout 30 batman version 2c udp port 162 Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 66 snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps or informs i e SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down notifications Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration 4 66 SNMP Commands 4 Command Usage e If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host c
312. ed that a multicast router is attached to it Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Immediate Leave Sets the status for immediate leave on the specified VLAN Default Disabled Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Immediate Leave Select the VLAN interface to configure set the status for immediate leave and click Apply IGMP Immediate Leave VLAN ID 1 x Immediate Leave 7 Enabled Figure 3 102 IGMP Immediate Leave CLI This example enables IGMP immediate leave for VLAN 1 and then displays the current IGMP snooping status Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave 4 254 Console config if end Console show ip igmp snooping 4 255 Service Status Enabled Querier Status Disabled Leave proxy status Disabled Query Count 2 Query Interval 125 sec Query Max Response Time 10 sec Router Port Expire Time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Enabled on VLAN k IGMP Snooping Version Version 2 Console 3 206 Multicast Filtering Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Mul
313. egation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Interval Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system con
314. eged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the ES4524M PoE is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure 4 12 Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted
315. egion is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 179 4 Command Line Interface Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 Range 0 for auto configuration 1 65535 for short path cost method 6 1 2
316. eived Requests are broadcast every few minutes using exponential backoff until IP configuration information is obtained from a BOOTP or DHCP server If the BOOTP or DHCP server is slow to respond the ip dhcp restart client command can also be used to start broadcasting service requests BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 2 5 2 Initial Configuration 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration c
317. em File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to startup config or tftp to file and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply Copy tftp to startup config ITFTP Serer IP Address 192 168119 Source File Name Bi econfig stertup Factory_Default Config cig z Startup File Name Figure 3 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Management Set Start Up page Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 455 startup Config_File Y 3661 O startup1 cfg Config_File N 3675 M10025 Operation_Code N 3842560 M10026 Operation_Code Y 3850952 Figure 3 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings 3 24 Basic Configuration CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console tcopy tftp startup config 4 24 TFTP serv
318. empt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts 3 27 Configuring the Switch e Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Telnet Telnet Status v Enabled Telnet Port Number fe Login Timeout 0 300 300 secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 3 Disabled Figure 3 2 Configuring the Telnet Interface CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty 4 30 Console config line login local 4 30 Console config line password 0 secret 4 31 Console config line timeout login response 300 4 32 Console config line exec timeout 600 4 33 Console config line password thresh 3 4 33 Console config line end Console tshow line vty 4 38 VTY conf
319. emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows e Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 e Set to the baud rate to 9600 bps Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity e Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 e With HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys Notes 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 44 29 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Comm
320. enabled or disabled Multicast Storm Limit Shows the multicast storm threshold 64 1 000 000 kilobits per second Unknown Unicast Storm Shows if unknown unicast storm control is enabled or disabled Unknown Unicast Storm Limit Shows the unknown unicast storm threshold 64 1 000 000 kilobits per second Flow Control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC Count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses Port Security Action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown Media Type Shows the forced or preferred port type to use for combination ports 23 24 copper forced SFP forced SFP preferred auto Current Status Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Port Operation Status Provides detailed information on port state Displayed only when the link is up Operation Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow Control Type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none 3 101 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Basic Information Port Type Mac Address Configuration Name Port Admin Speed duplex Capabilities Broadcast Stor
321. enabled port to advertise and accept Extended Power over Ethernet configuration and usage information Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp medtlv extpoe Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises extended Power over Ethernet capability details such as power availability from the switch and power state of the switch including whether the switch is operating from primary or backup power the Endpoint Device could use this information to decide to enter power conservation mode Note that this device does not support PoE capabilities Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if no lldp medtlv extpoe Console config if Ildp medtlv inventory This command configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its inventory identification details Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp medtlv inventory Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises device details useful for inventory management such as manufacturer model software version and other pertinent information 4 227 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if no lldp medtlv inventory Console config if IIdp medtlv location This command configures an LLDP MED enabled port to adv
322. encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets password for changing command modes 4 77 4 79 4 Command Line Interface RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol t hat uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 4 30 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 80 radius server port Sets the RADI
323. end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range 3 76 User Authentication Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry Telnet IP Filter f192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet IP Filter List Start IP o Address End IP Address Add Telnet IP Filtering Entry Remove Telnet IP Filtering Entry a Figure 3 39 Filtering Management Access CLI This example restricts management access for Telnet clients Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 19 4 107 Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config exit Console show management all client 4 108 Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192168 1 19 1922168 1 19 2 192 168 1 325 192 168 1 30 Console 3 77 Configuring the Switch Client Security Thi
324. entication methods Port based authentication using IEEE 802 1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access to the data ports This switch provides secure network management access4 using the following options e User Accounts Manually configure management access rights for users e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights e HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection e SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports e IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Command Attributes e Account List Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels Default admin and guest e New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 16 Ac
325. ept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address 4 107 4 Command Line Interface Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show management all client Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address ds 192 168 1219 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 11 25 192 168 1 30 SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 768 2 1219 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1225 192 168 1 30 TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 lt 168 1 30 Console
326. equest packets then click Apply DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Information Option Status C Enabled DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy Replace Figure 3 48 DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration 3 92 Client Security CLI This example enables DHCP Snooping Information Option and sets the policy as replace Console config ip dhcp snooping information option 4 120 Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy replace 4 121 Console config exit Console tshow ip dhcp snooping Global DHCP Snooping status disable DHCP Snooping Information Option Status disable DHCP Snooping Information Policy replace DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs Verify Source Mac Address enable Interface Trusted Eth 1 1 No Eth 1 2 No Eth 1 3 No DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network Command Usage Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted state e Set all other ports outside the local network or firewall to untrusted state Command Attributes Trust Status Enables or disables port as trusted Default Disabled Web Click DHCP S
327. er Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped 3 89 Configuring the Switch DHCP Snooping Configuration Use the DHCP Snooping Configuration page to enable DHCP Snooping globally on the switch or to configure MAC Address Verification Command Attributes DHCP Snooping Status Enables DHCP snooping globally Default Disabled e DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification Enables or disables MAC address verification DHCP packets will be dropped if the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client s hardware address in the DHCP packet Default Enabled Web Click DHCP Snooping Configuration Select the required options and click Apply DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Status Enabled DHCP Snooping MAC Address Verification V Enabled Figure 3 46 DHCP Snooping Configuration CLI This example first enables DHCP Snooping and MAC address verification Console config ip dhcp snooping 4 115 Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address 4 119 Console config DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4094 e DHCP Snooping Status Enables or disables DHCP
328. er ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload To select another configuration file as the start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console tconfig Console config boot system config startup new 4 28 Console config exit Console reload 4 13 Console Port Settings You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication settings These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes e Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0 seconds e Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is re
329. er without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses e Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree 3 155 Configuring the Switch Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Admin MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 141 the maximum path cost is 65 535 By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on eac
330. ers On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Authentication One of the following authentication methods is employed Password Authentication for SSH v1 5 or V2 Clients a The client sends its password to the server b The switch compares the client s password to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the connection is allowed Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys Public Key Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access it The following exchanges take place during this process Authenticating SSH v1 5 Clients a The client sends its RSA public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256 bit string as a challenge encrypts this string with the user s public key and sends it to the cl
331. ers GC 4 56 rcommand Provides configuration access to Member switches GC 4 56 show cluster Displays the switch clustering status PE 4 57 show cluster members Displays current cluster Members PE 4 57 show cluster candidates Displays current cluster Candidates in the network PE 4 57 Using Switch Clustering e A switch cluster has a Commander unit that is used to manage all other Member switches in the cluster The management station uses both Telnet and the web interface to communicate directly with the Commander through its IP address while the Commander manages Member switches using the cluster s internal IP addresses Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled switches in the network These Candidate switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the administrator through the management station 4 53 4 Command Line Interface Note Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection to the Commander From the Commander CLI prompt use the rcommand command see page 4 56 to connect to the Member switch cluster This command enables clustering on the switch Use the no form to disable clustering Syntax no cluster Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e To create a switch cluster first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch
332. ersion 3 IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be 1 2 Description of Software Features 1 enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then att
333. ertise its location identification details Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp medtlv location Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises location identification details Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lldp medtlv location Console config if IIdp medtlv med cap This command configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its Media Endpoint Device capabilities Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp medtlv med cap Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises LLDP MED TLV capabilities allowing Media Endpoint and Connectivity Devices to efficiently discover which LLDP MED related TLVs are supported on the switch 4 228 LLDP Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if lldp medtlv med cap Console config if IIdp medtlv network policy This command configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its network policy configuration Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp medtlv network policy Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises network policy configuration information aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configur
334. erver host 10 1 19 98 robin version 2c config snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth config 2 7 2 Initial Configuration Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IEEE 802 1d bridge MIB It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group call r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and the password einstien for encryption Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included 4 69 Console config snmp server view 802 1d 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 included Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth mib 2 802 1d 4 71 Console config snmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 73 Console config For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 33 37 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting
335. es swipFilterRejectTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 1 7 1 0 40 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is rejected by the IP Filter These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the SNMP Configuration menu page 3 42 3 50 Simple Network Management Protocol Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read and write views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups New Delete Grotp Name Model Level Read View Write View Notify View Cc public vi noAuthNoPriv defaultview none hone O public DLC noAuthNoPriv defaultview none none E private vi ngAuthNoPriv defaultview defaultview none m private v2e roup Properties m secure users V3 Group Name Security Model Security Level SNMPv3 Views Read View defaultview x o Write View C defaultview z og ge ce Notify View C defaultview z Figure 3 28 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups CLI Use the snmp server group command to configure a new group specifying the security model and level and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views Conso
336. es a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted 3 20 Basic Configuration Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If
337. es the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets e ACL Name Name of the ACL Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding IP Trunk IN IN M Enabled david ra I Enabled jerry z E Enabled david Z F Enabled jerv I Enabled david z I Enabled jerry ag I Enabled dav l I Enabled je l I Enabled dav iy I Enabled jerry zj Figure 3 45 Mapping ACLs to Port Ingress Queues CLI This examples assigns an IP access list to port 1 and a MAC access list to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if ip access group david in 4 127 Console config if exit Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 2 config if mac access group jerry in config if DHCP Snooping The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping or using the static bindings configured with IP Source Guard DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port Command Usage e Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP mes
338. event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 17 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 45 ogging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 4 46 ogging sendmai Email address used for From field of alert messages GC 4 46 source email ogging sendmai Email recipients of alert messages GC 4 47 destination emai logging sendmai Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 47 show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE PE 4 48 logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host jp_address ip_address IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify
339. ew Shows the SNMPv3 views PE 4 70 snmp server group Adds an SNMPVv3 group mapping users to views GC 4 71 show snmp group Shows the SNMPv3 groups PE 4 72 SNMP Commands 4 Table 4 21 SNMP Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page snmp server user Adds a user to an SNMPv3 group GC 4 73 show snmp user Shows the SNMPv3 users PE 4 74 snmp server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Syntax no snmp server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server Console config show snmp This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command 4 61 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent Enabled SNMP Traps Authentication Enabled Link up down Enabled SNMP Communities 1 public and the privilege is read only 2 private and the privilege is read write 0 SNMP packets input Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name suppl
340. example shows how to download new firmware from a TFTP server Console tcopy tftp file TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name ES4524M PoE_V1 0 0 5 bix Destination file name ES4524M PoE_V1 0 0 5 bix Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console tcopy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 4 25 4 Command Line Interface The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19
341. face Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address The interface number and OID are included to assist SNMP applications perform network discovery by indicating enterprise specific or other starting points for the search such as the Interface or Entity MIB e Since there are typically a number of different addresses associated with a Layer 3 device an individual LLDP PDU may contain more than one management address TLV e Every management address TLV that reports an address that is accessible on a port and protocol VLAN through the particular port should be accompanied by a port and protocol VLAN TLV that indicates the VLAN identifier VID associated with the management address reported by this TLV Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp basic tlv management ip address Console config if 4 220 LLDP Commands 4 IIldp basic tlv port description This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its port description Use the no form to di
342. face ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport private vlan mapping 2 Console config if show vlan private vian Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch Syntax show vlan private vilan mapping community primary community Displays all community VLANs along with their associated primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces e primary Displays all primary VLANs along with any assigned promiscuous interfaces Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Executive 4 207 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show vlan private vlan Primary Secondary Type Interfaces 5 primary Eth1 3 5 6 community Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Console Configuring Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 4 7 Protocol based VLAN Commands
343. fic classes Global GVRP status GMRP Console Displaying Current VLANs Extended multicast filtering services 4 191 256 4094 No Yes IVL Yes No Enabled Disabled Disabled The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time e Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry e Egress Ports Shows the egress VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select an ID from the list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 7 Up Time at Creation 0 dO hO min7 s Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports Unit Poni a Uniti Port2 Unit Port3 Unit Port4 Unitl Por6 Unitl Por Uniti Pong Unitl Pong z Figure 3 78 VLAN Current Table 3 161 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes CLI e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes e Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynami
344. fig show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp user EngineId 01000000000000000000000000 User Name steve Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol mdt Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 4 25 show snmp user display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent 4 74 Authentication Commands 4 Table 4 25 show snmp user display description Continued Field Description Authentication Protocol The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 Storage Type Row Status The storage type for this entry The row status of this entry SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1X Table 4 26 Authentication Commands
345. figuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 4 135 configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk C Ethernet 4 148 Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp Configures LACP for the current interface C Ethernet 4 149 lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP system priority C Ethernet 4 150 lacp admin key Configures a port s administration key IC Ethernet 4 151 lacp admin key Configures a port channel s administration key C Port Channel 4 152 lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP port priority C Ethernet 4 153 Trunk Status Display Commands show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 4 143 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 154 4 147 4 Command Line Interface Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to 8 ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings Any of the ports can be trunked together including ports of different media types All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified
346. for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client m Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 16 SNTP Server frat 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Figure 3 19 SNTP Configuration 3 35 Configuring the Switch CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and then displays the current time and settings Console config sntp client 4 49 Console config sntp poll 60 4 50 Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 50 Console config exit Console show sntp Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes e Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters
347. formation advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB MED TLV Type Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages Port Capabilities This option advertises LLDP MED TLV capabilities allowing Media Endpoint and Connectivity Devices to efficiently discover which LLDP MED related TLVs are supported on the switch Network Policy This option advertises network policy configuration information aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption Location This option advertises location identification details Extended Power This option advertises extended Power over Ethernet capability details such as power availability from the switch and power state of the switch including whether the switch is operating from primary or backup power the Endpoint Device could use this information to decide to enter power conservation mode Note that this device does not support PoE capabilities Inventory This option advertises device details useful for inventory management such as manufacturer model software version and other pertinent information Trunk Specifies if the port is a member of a trunk 3 179 Configuring the Switch Web Click LLDP Port Trunk Configuration Set the LLDP transmit receive mode specify whether or not to send
348. formation as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or Trunk Information A Port Information Tree Status Transilons Cost Bridge Port OPer Path Cost Lityp ledge Port POrtRole omber Enabled Forwarding 4 0 32768 0 0016B6FO3BEC 128 1 100000 Point to Point Enabled Designated Enabled Discarding 0 0 32768
349. frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes e Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 e Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port 17 CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 186 Class of Service Configuration Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Default Port Priority Port Default Priority 0 7 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 fo 4 2 fo 4 3 fo 4 Pa 5 EE 4 6 fo 4 7 fo 4 m Figure 3 92 Default Port Priority CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 135 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 235 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 3 4 145 Information of Eth 1 3 Broadcast Threshold Enabled 64 Kbits second Multicast Threshold Disabled Unknown unicast Threshold Disabled LACP Status Di
350. g new trunks e Port Port identifier Range 1 24 Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Uniti Porti Unit Port3 Uniti Porta eA Pon ft 2 Uniti PortS Remove Unit Port Figure 3 57 LACP Port Configuration 3 108 Port Configuration CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 4 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if lacp 4 149 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 143 Information of Trunk 1 Basic Information Port Type 1000T Mac Address 00 16 B6 F0 3B EF Configuration Name Port Admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000ful1l Flow Control Disabled Port Security Disabled Max MAC Count 0 Current Status Created By LACP Link Status Up Port Operation Status Up Operation Speed duplex 1000full Flow Control Type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Console 3 109 Configuring the Switch Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel
351. gle or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1 X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dot1x operation mode single host multi host max count count no dot1x operation mode multi host max count single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 1024 Default 5 4 100 Authentication Commands 4 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 105 In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dot1x re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dot1x re authenti
352. h port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 The recommended range is listed in Table 3 1 on page 3 149 The recommended path cost is listed in Table 3 2 on page 3 149 The default path costs are listed in Table 3 3 on page 3 150 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 0 gt a ___ Port STA State Priority Admin MST Path Cost Trunk 0 240 in steps of 16 1 200000000 0 Auto 1 Forwarding 1 28 0 2 Forwarding 128 io 3 Discarding 128 io 4 Discarding 0 50 5 Discarding 128 jo zi Figure 3 4 MSTP Port Configuration CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 4 135 Console config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 4 186 Console config if spanning tree mst cost 50 4 185 Console config if 3 156 VLAN Configuration VLAN Configuration Overview In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network n
353. hanges by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 4 135 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 268 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart client 4 270 Console show ip interface 4 271 IP Address and Netmask 192 168 0 192 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 Address Mode DHCP Console copy running config startup config 4 24 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as EdgeView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMPv3 construct for the default public community str
354. haracter is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 11 enable password 4 77 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 10 4 11 4 Command Line Interface configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 14 show history This command shows the contents
355. has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Glossary 4 Glossary Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP
356. hat range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 3 142 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 9 Configuration Digest An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table In other words this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST e Region Revision 2 The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 e Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Max Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 12 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 3 143 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State M Enabled Spanning Tree Type MSTP x Priority 0 61440 in steps of 4096 32768 Spanning Tree BPDU Flooding When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1
357. he Enable checkbox to specify the ports which are to be updated e Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner 3 110 Port Configuration Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Also note that you must use the Enable checkbox to specify the ports for which the Admin Key is to be updated Aggregation Port Set Port Actor System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 I Enabled fi20 I Enabled fizo i I Enabled fi20 I Enabled fizo i I Enabled fizo i I Enabled fizo sd Figure 3 58 LACP Aggregation Port Configuration
358. he port is not trusted it is processed as follows If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Ifthe DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP serv
359. he port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 202 4 194 VLAN Commands 4 vian This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan vian id name vian name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vian id name state e vian id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan vian id deletes the VLAN no vlan vian id name removes the VLAN name no vlan vian id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch The switch allows 255 user manageable VLANs One extra unmanageable VLAN VLAN ID 4093 is maintained for switch clustering Example The following example adds a VLAN using VL
360. hen the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 78 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server 4 89 4 Command Line Interface To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 7505461 73253 13674890836547254 15020245593 199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 1082591 3212890233 76546801 72627257 1413428762941301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545 2408397 1752646358058 1 76716709574804776117 Import Client s Public Ke
361. ibutes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 2 4094 Type There are three types of private VLANs Primary Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and to their community ports within secondary or community VLANs Community Conveys traffic between community ports and to their promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN Current Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Configuration Enter the VLAN ID number select Primary or Community type then click Add To remove a private VLAN from the switch highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove Note that all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted Private VLAN Configuration Current New 6 Community VLAN lt lt Add VLAN ID 1 4094 7 Community VLAN Remove Type Primary Figure 3 84 Private VLAN Configuration 3 170 VLAN Configuration CLI This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN and VLAN 6 as a community VLAN Console config vlan database 4 194 Console config vlan private vlan 5 primary 4 204 Console config vlan private vlan 6 community Console config vlan Associating Private VLANs Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN Command Attributes Primary VLAN ID ID of primary VLAN 2 4094 Association Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN Non Associat
362. ication Commands 4 Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config 4 81 4 Command Line Interface radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server ret
363. ication is used Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and the baud rate to 9600 bps e Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact technical support for help B 1 B Troubleshooting Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 Enable logging Set the error messages reported to include all categories Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed Contact your distributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol B
364. ied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs ooooo0oo0o0co0c o oooo 0o 0o SNMP Logging Disabled Console snmp server community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects 4 62 SNMP Commands 4 Default Setting public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact
365. ient d The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string computes the MD5 checksum and sends the checksum back to the switch e The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original string it sent If the two checksums match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated 3 62 User Authentication Authenticating SSH v2 Clients a The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable b If the specified algorithm is supported by the switch it notifies the client to proceed with the authentication process Otherwise it rejects the request c The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch d When the server receives this message it checks whether the supplied key is acceptable for authentication and if so it then checks whether the signature is correct If both checks succeed the client is authenticated Note The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to
366. ier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group 4 257 4 Command Line Interface Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 258 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip ig
367. ies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to running config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration file File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space 3 23 Configuring the Switch Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click Syst
368. if 4 199 4 Command Line Interface switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged remove vian lisi no switchport allowed vlan add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting e All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default e The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged e If atrunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member e Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to
369. ific interface 4 243 4 Command Line Interface Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map page 4 244 before creating a Policy Map page 4 246 Otherwise you will not be able to specify a Class Map with the class command page 4 246 after entering Policy Map Configuration mode class map This command creates a class map used for matching packets to the specified class and enters Class Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no class map class map name match any match any Match any condition within a class map class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command page 4 245 to specify the criteria for ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map e Up to 16 match commands are permitted per class map e The class map is used with a policy map page 4 246 to create a service policy page 4 249 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Example This example creates a class map call rd_class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3
370. iguration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 2 CLI only 3 28 Basic Configuration Configuring Event Logging The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes e System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default
371. iguration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 10 Both Destination 1 13 Source Port 1 7 lt lt Add Px T Type emove Target Port 1 Y Figure 3 63 Configuring a Mirror Port CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 135 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 4 157 Console config if 3 120 Port Configuration Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Rate Limit Configuration Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting Command Usage Input and output rate limits can be enabled or disabled for individual
372. igure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Figure 3 101 Figure 3 102 Figure 3 103 Figure 3 104 Figure 3 105 Figure 3 106 Figure 3 107 Figure 3 108 Figure 3 109 Figure 3 110 Figure 3 111 Figure 3 112 Figure 3 113 Figure 3 114 Figure 3 115 Figure 3 116 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members VLAN Static Membership by Port Configuring VLAN Ports Private VLAN Information Private VLAN Configuration Private VLAN Association Private VLAN Port Information Private VLAN Port Configuration Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN System Configuration LLDP Configuration LLDP Port Configuration LLDP Local Device Information LLDP Remote Port Information LLDP Remote Information Details LLDP Device Statistics LLDP Device Statistics Details Default Port Priority Configuring Traffic Classes Setting the Queue Mode Configuring Queue Scheduling IP DSCP Priority Status Mapping IP DSCP Priority to Class of Service Values Configuring Class Maps Configuring Policy Maps Service Policy Settings Configuring IGMP IGMP Immediate Leave Displaying Multicast Router Port Information Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services Specifying Multicast Port Membership MVR Global Configuration MVR P
373. igure Layer 2 traffic priority on the switch Table 4 3 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted GC 4 234 Round Robin WRR switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 235 queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority queues GC 4 236 queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority queues IC 4 237 show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 238 show queue bandwidth Shows round robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4 238 show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 239 showinterfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an PE 4 145 interface queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode e strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues e wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 8 for queues 0 3 respectively 4 234 Class of Service Commands 4 Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage
374. imal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 e flag bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Default Setting None Command Mode Extended IP ACL Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate 24 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 4 125 4 Command Line Interface match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned e The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and O means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18
375. in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 84 Authentication Commands 4 Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with TACACS server Server port number 30 Console Web Server Commands This section describes commands used to configure web browser management access to the switch Table 4 32 Web Server Command Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 4 85 ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4 86 ip http secure server Enables HTTPS SSL for encrypted communications GC 4 86 ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS SSL GC 4 87 ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 4 85 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration
376. information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 64 4 63 4 Command Line Interface snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 63 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host adar inform retry retries timeout seconds community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port port no snmp server host host addr host adar Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 recipient destination IP address entries inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 host
377. ing ip source guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip source guard sip sip mac e sip Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table sip mac Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Default Setting Disabled 4 111 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage 4 112 Source guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor Setting source guard mode to sip or sip mac enables this function on the selected port Use the sip option to check the VLAN ID source IP address and port number against all entries in the binding table Use the sip mac option to check these same parameters plus the source MAC address Use the no source guard command to disable this function on the selected port When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP S
378. ing Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command 4 8 Command Groups 4 Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Group Index Command Group Description Page General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the 4 10 system or quitting the CLI System Management Display and setting of system information basic modes of operation 4 15 maximum frame size file management console port and telnet sett
379. ing Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 180 takes precedence over port priority page 4 181 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs 4 175 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting e No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance e The region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp Related Commands spanning tree spanning disabled 4 179 mst priority 4 177 name
380. ing example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console Console Console Console config interface port channel 1 config if exit config interface ethernet 1 11 config if lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex and auto negotiation Atrunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 149 4 Command Line Interface Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 10 12 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Console Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console Console config if lacp Console config if end Conso Information of Trunk 1 Basic
381. ing or which have been statically assigned using the group keyword e The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 4 253 Note that only IGMPv1 v2 multicast report messages or IGMPv2 leave messages sent by IGMPv1 v2 hosts are supported by the current MVR standard Example The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch enables immediate leave on one of the receiver ports and statically assigns a multicast group to another receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mvr type source Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if mvr type receiver Console config if mvr immediate Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 7 Console config if mvr type receiver Console config if mvr group 225 0 0 5 mvr immediate This command causes the switch to immediately removes an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group Use the no form to restore the default settings Syntax no mvr immediate Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage
382. ing that provides read access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the entire MIB tree However you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 3 52 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users and set the access level Basic Configuration 2 The default strings are public Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server communit
383. ings system logs SMTP alerts system clock switch clustering and UPnP Simple Network Activates authentication failure traps configures community access 4 60 Management Protocol strings and trap receivers User Authentication Configures user names and passwords logon access using local or 4 75 remote authentication management access through the web server Telnet server and Secure Shell as well as port security IEEE 802 1X port access control and restricted access based on specified IP addresses Client Security Segregates traffic for clients attached to common data ports and 4 109 prevents unauthorized access by configuring valid static or dynamic addresses and filtering DHCP requests and replies Access Control Lists Provides filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP 4 122 port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports 4 135 aggregated links and VLANs Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures 4 147 Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data 4 157 passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limit Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 159 Power over Ethernet Configures power output for connected devices 4 160 Add
384. interfaces Command Attribute e Rate Limit Status Enables or disables the rate limit Default Disabled e Rate Limit Sets the rate limit level Range 64 1000000 kilobits per second Web Click Port Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration For a 1 Gbps port the threshold range is 64 to 1000000 kilobits per second Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Kbps Trunk 1 I Enabled 1000000 M Enabled l Enabled I Enabled I Enabled I Enabled I Enabled 1000000 I Enabled 1000000 a Orn Di nm amp wi nr Figure 3 64 Configuring Port Rate Limits 3 121 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets the rate limit for input traffic passing through port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 135 Console config if rate limit input 64000 4 159 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loa
385. ion Community VLANs not associated with the selected VLAN Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Association Select the required primary VLAN from the scroll down box highlight one or more community VLANs in the Non Association list box and click Add to associate these entries with the selected primary VLAN A community VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN a Private VLAN Association Primary VLAN ID 5 Association Non Association none 6 nmunity Vlan lt cAdd 7 Community Vian Remove ae Figure 3 85 Private VLAN Association CLI This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary VLAN 5 Console config vlan database 4 194 Console config vlan private vlan 5 association 6 4 205 Console config vlan private vlan 5 association 7 Console config 3 171 Configuring the Switch Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk Information menus to display the interface associated with private VLANs Command Attributes e Port Trunk The switch interface PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Normal The port is not configured in a private VLAN Host The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with the designated promiscuous port s Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN
386. ion Details Select an interface from the drop down lists and click Query LLDP Remote Device Information Detail Interface Port a Trunk l Query Local Port 1 Chassis Type MAC Address Chassis ID 00 01 02 03 04 05 Port Type MAC Address Port Description Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 Port ID 00 01 02 03 04 06 System Name System Description ES3528M System Capabilities Supported Bridge System Capabilities Enabled Bridge Management Address 192 168 0 101 IPv4 Figure 3 6 LLDP Remote Information Details CLI This example displays LLDP information for an LLDP enabled remote device attached to a specific port on this switch Console show lldp info remote device detail ethernet 1 1 4 232 LLDP Remote Devices Information Detail Local PortName Eth 1 1 Chassis Type MAC Address Chassis Id 00 01 02 03 04 05 PortID Type MAC Address PortID 00 01 02 03 04 06 SysName SysDescr SMC Networks SMC6128L2 PortDescr Ethernet Port on unit 1 port 1 SystemCapSupported Bridge SystemCapEnabled Bridge Remote Management Address 00 01 02 03 04 05 MAC Address Console 3 183 Configuring the Switch Displaying Device Statistics Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to display aggregate statistics about all LLDP enabled device connected to this switch Web Click LLDP Device Statistics LLDP Device Statistics Neighbor
387. ion Media Type Trunk m ooi E M Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 1 M Enabled 100iull M Enabled 7 10f 100f m 1000F FEC None oon M Enabled M 10h M 100h F 1000h M Sym 2 silanes 100full M Enabled 10f 100f m 1000F FEC None Enabled F 10h F 100h F 1000h F Sym 3 meted 1o0full m Enabled m 10f E 100f m 1000f TEC None f T Ir M Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym 7 H Enabled loot H F Enabled m 10f F 100f m1000 MFC None il M Enabled M 10h M 100h m 1000h M Sym 3 Fa Enabled 10oHut H F Enabled Of F 100f 1000F MFC None al f roo 1 Goon E M Enabled M 10h M 100h M 1000h M Sym i F Enabled mu E F Enabled F 10f m 100f F 1000F MFC None E TTE M Enabled M 10h M 100h m 1000h M Sym 7 F Enabled oul m Enabled Aor dor ai 0dr FE None id Figure 3 55 Configuring Port Attributes CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config interface ethernet 1 13 4 135 Console config if description RD SW 13 4 136 Console config if shutdown 4 141 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 137 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 136 Console config if flowcontrol 4 139 Console config if negotiation Console config if capabilities 100half 4 138 Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 23 Console config if media type copper forced 24
388. ion or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Default Setting e Status Disabled Action None e Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted e First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port e Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default e You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command e A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port e Ifa port
389. iority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 255 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all of the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 6 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NT OD aj BY wl PP oO Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP and default switchport priority e DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if 4 241 4 Command Line Interface show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id
390. ip access group 4 127 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip access group ac _name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if 4 127 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands show ip access list 4 127 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 4 127 MAC ACLs The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and Ethernet type To configure MAC ACLs first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules and then bind the access list to one or more ports Table 4 2 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Cr
391. ired settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration GARP GARP GARP A LeaveAll Join Leave Timer Acceptable Ingress GVRP Timer Timer E Trunk Port PVID Frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi Bose Mode Member Seconds Seconds 20 1000 60 3000 18000 1 ff AS Enabled MeEnabled 20 feo fioo0 Hyori z fi ALL Enabled M Enabled 20 60 foo Hybrid B Tagged Enabled M Enabled e0 feo foo Hybrida z fi AL S enabled M Enabled 20 feo foon Hybrid z M AL Enabled M Enabled 30 a0 2o00 Hybrid z 6 Poo at z F Enabled l Enabled po eo foo Hybrid z zi wN gt in Figure 3 82 Configuring VLAN Ports CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 135 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 197 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 198 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 199 Console config if switchport gvrp 4 191 Console config if garp timer join 20 4 192 Console config if garp timer leave 90 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 197 Console config if Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security between ports using primary and secondary VLAN groups A primary
392. is priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used 4 235 4 Command Line Interface e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the eight class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 8 are assigned to queues 0 3 respecti
393. is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command 4 110 Client Security Commands 4 Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 141 mac address table static 4 166 show mac address table 4 167 IP Source Guard Commands IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping Commands on page 4 115 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard Table 4 2 IP Source Guard Commands Command Function Mode Page ip source guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP IC 4 111 address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address ip source guard Adds a static address to the source guard binding table GC 4 113 binding show ip Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each PE 4 114 source guard interface show ip Shows the source guard binding table PE 4 114 source guard bind
394. is example sets the interface to both transmit and receive LLDP messages enables SNMP trap messages enables MED notification and specifies the TLV MED TLV dot1 TLV and dot3 TLV parameters to advertise config interface ethernet 1 1 ldp ldp ldp ldp ldp admin status tx rx notification medNotification basic tlv basic tlv port description system description Console Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if Console config if 3 180 ldp ldp ldp ldp ldp ldp ldp ldp basic tlv basic tlv basic tlv medtlv medtlv medtlv medtlv medtlv management ip address system name system capabilities med cap network policy location extPoe inventory 4 135 4 218 4 218 4 219 4 221 4 222 4 220 4 222 4 221 4 228 4 229 4 228 4 227 4 227 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Displaying LLDP Local Device Information Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the switch such as its MAC address chassis ID management IP address and port information Web Click LLDP Local Information LLDP Local Device Information Chassis Type MAC Address Chassis ID 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC System Name System Description 24 port 10 100 100
395. isplay only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type Eth1 11 IGMP IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 This section describes commands used to configure Layer 2 IGMP query on the switch Table 3 10 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP GC 4 257 snooping ip igmp snooping query count Configures the query count GC 4 257 ip igmp snooping query interval Configures the query interval GC 4 258 ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 258 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 259 router port expire time 4 256 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The quer
396. itch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use SNMPV3 first set an SNMP engine ID or accept the default specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 4 21 SNMP Commands 4 60 Command Function Mode Page snmp server Enables the SNMPv3 server GC 4 61 show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE PE 4 61 snmp server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to GC 4 62 SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 63 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 64 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 4 64 snmp server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e SNMP GC 4 66 notifications snmp server engine id Sets the SNMPv3 engine ID GC 4 67 show snmp engine id Shows the SNMPv3 engine ID PE 4 68 snmp server view Adds an SNMPVv3 view GC 4 69 show snmp vi
397. its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The current version of the firmware supports only the MD5 authentication method TLS TTLS and PEAP will be supported in future releases The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked The operation of 802 1X on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned The IP address of the RADIUS server specified 802 1X must be enabled globally for the switch e Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type The current version of the fir
398. ity Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk 1 None D Enabled fo 2 Noe H I Enabled Po J 3 None F Enabled Doo 4 Nowe I Enabled bo 5 Trap and Shutdown M Enabled fo 6 None T Enabled fo 7 None I Enabled bo 8 None D Enabled ob 9 None I Enabled bo 10 None I Enabled bo 11 None Enabled bo 12 None Enabled boo y Figure 3 40 Configuring Port Security CLI This example sets the command mode to Port 5 sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and then enables port security for the switch config interface ethernet 1 5 config if port security action trap and shutdown 4 110 config if port security config if Console Console Console Console 3 80 Client Security Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list
399. k to display information 3 183 Device Statistics Displays device statistics 3 184 Device Statistics Details Allows the user to select the port or trunk on which to display 3 185 statistical information Priority 3 186 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 186 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 186 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output queues 3 188 Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin 3 190 Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 191 IP DSCP Priority Status Globally selects IP DSCP Priority or disables it 3 192 IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority mapping a 3 192 DSCP tag to a class of service value QoS Quality of Service 3 194 DiffServ Configures QoS classification criteria and service policies 3 194 Class Map Sets Class Maps 3 195 Policy Map Sets Policy Maps 3 198 Service Policy Defines service policy settings for ports 3 201 IGMP Snooping 3 202 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures parameters for 3 204 multicast query IGMP Immediate Leave Enables the immediate leave function 3 206 Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 3 207 Port Information router for each VLAN ID Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Main Menu
400. known as POST Power On Self Test 2 8 Managing System Files 2 Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows The switch has a total of 32 Mbytes of flash memory for system files In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command New startup configuration files must have a name specified File names on the switch are case sensitive can be from 1 to 31 characters must not contain slashes or and the leading letter of the file name must not be a period Valid characters A Z a z 0 9
401. l Type Specifies the protocol type to match The available options are IP ARP and RARP If LLC Other is chosen for the Frame Type the only available Protocol Type is IPX Raw Note Traffic which matches IP Protocol Ethernet Frames is mapped to the VLAN VLAN 1 that has been configured with the switch s administrative IP IP Protocol Ethernet traffic must not be mapped to another VLAN or you will lose administrative network connectivity to the switch If lost in this manner network access can be regained by removing the offending Protocol VLAN rule via the console Alternately the switch can be power cycled however all unsaved configuration changes will be lost 3 174 VLAN Configuration Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New none i Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 h X Rena Frame Type Ethernet x Protocol Type IP M Figure 3 88 Protocol VLAN Configuration Configuring the Protocol VLAN System Use the Protocol VLAN System Configuration menu to map a Protocol VLAN Group to a VLAN Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group Range 1 2147483647 e VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN System Configuration Protocol VLAN System Configuration Current New Group 2 VLAN 2 Add Protocol Group ID
402. l configuration settings 3 70 Configuration Configures protocol parameters 3 71 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual ports 3 71 Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3 74 ACL Access Control Lists 3 81 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses 3 81 Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 87 IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access 3 76 Port 3 99 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 99 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 99 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 102 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 102 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 106 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol 3 107 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 107 Aggregation Port Configures system priority admin key and port priority 3 110 Port Counters Information Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 3 113 Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for local side 3 114 Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for remote side 3 116 Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3 118 Tr
403. lays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channe counters internal neighbors sys id port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 32 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side sys id Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Comman Privil Example Channel all d Mode eged Exec Console Channel LACPDUs Sent LACPDUs Receive Marker Sent Marker Receive LACPDUs Unknown Pkts LACPDUs Illegal Pkts show lacp 1 counters group 1 Table 4 5 show lacp counters display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs llegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a b
404. le config snmp server group secure users v3 priv read defaultview write defaultview notify defaultview 4 71 Console config exit Console show snmp group 4 72 Group Name secure users Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View defaultview Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console 3 51 Configuring the Switch Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes e View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view e Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Views Click New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to mak
405. lex mode setting point to point Point to point link shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link e RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point Console config if 4 184 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default auto configuration mode Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst instance_id cost e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes e cost Path cost for an interface Range 0 for auto configuration 1 65535 for short path cost method 1 200 000 000 for long path cost method The
406. ling Jumbo Frames Managing Firmware Downloading System Software from a Server Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server Console Port Settings Telnet Settings Configuring Event Logging System Log Configuration Remote Log Configuration Displaying Log Messages Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts Resetting the System Setting the System Clock Configuring SNTP Setting the Time Zone Simple Network Management Protocol Enabling the SNMP Agent Setting Community Access Strings Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access Setting the Local Engine ID Specifying a Remote Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Setting SNMPv3 Views User Authentication Configuring User Accounts Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Configuring HTTPS Configuring the Secure Shell Generating the Host Key Pair Configuring Public Keys for Clients Configuring the SSH Server Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication Displaying 802 1X Global Settings Configuring 802 1X Global Settings Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Statistics Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access Client Security Configuring Port Security Access Control Lists Setting the ACL Name and Type 3 76 3 78 3 78 3 81 3 82 Configuring a Standard IP ACL Configuring an Extended IP ACL Configuring a MAC ACL Binding a Port to an Ac
407. llowing commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Commands Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 30 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 123 Control List access list ip extended Console config ext acl 4 123 access list mac Console config mac acl 4 128 4 7 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 2 Configuration Commands Continued Mode Command Prompt Page Interface interface ethernet port 4 135 port channel idl vlan ia Console config if MSTP spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 176 Policy Map policy map Console config pmap 4 246 VLAN vian database Console config vlan 4 194 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line process
408. log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Logs Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number Information VLAN 1 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information STP topology change notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 redundant power change to good Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 main power change to not exist Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 3 link up notification Log Messages Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information System coldStart notification Figure 3 16 Displaying Logs CLI This example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 4 44 1 00 01 37 2001 01 01 DHCP request failed will retry later level 4 module 9 function 0 and event no 10 0 00 00 35 2001 01 01 System coldStart notification level 6 module 6 function 1 and event no 1 Console Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts To alert system administrators of problems the switch can use SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level The messages are sent to specified
409. lt Setting No Members Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The maximum number of cluster Members is 36 The maximum number of switch Candidates is 100 Example Console config cluster member mac address 00 12 34 56 78 9a id 5 Console config rcommand This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration Syntax rcommand id lt member id gt member id The ID number of the Member switch Range 1 36 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command only operates through a Telnet connection to the Commander switch Managing cluster Members using the local console CLI on the Commander is not supported e There is no need to enter the username and password for access to the Member switch CLI 4 56 System Management Commands 4 Example Console rcommand id 1 CLI session with the SMC8124PL2 is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console show cluster This command shows the switch clustering configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster Role commander Interval heartbeat 30 Heartbeat loss count 3 Number of Members 1 Number of Candidates 2 Console show cluster members This command shows the current switch cluster members Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show cluster members Cluster Members ID 1 Role Active member IP Address 10 254 254 2 MAC Address 00 12 cf 23
410. lticast static router port 3 208 4 260 MVR assigning static multicast groups 4 263 setting interface type 4 263 4 264 setting multicast groups 4 262 specifying a VLAN 4 262 using immediate leave 4 263 4 264 P password line 4 31 passwords 2 4 administrator setting 3 54 4 76 path cost 3 138 3 147 method 3 142 4 175 STA 3 138 3 147 4 175 port authentication 4 98 port power displaying status 3 129 4 164 inline 3 130 4 162 inline status 3 129 4 164 maximum allocation 3 129 4 163 priority 3 131 4 163 showing mainpower 3 129 4 165 port priority configuring 3 186 3 194 4 234 4 243 default ingress 3 186 4 235 STA 3 147 4 181 port security configuring 3 78 4 109 port statistics 3 122 4 144 ports autonegotiation 3 103 4 137 broadcast storm threshold 3 118 4 141 capabilities 3 103 4 138 duplex mode 3 102 4 136 flow control 3 103 4 139 forced selection on combo ports 3 103 4 140 multicast storm threshold 4 141 speed 3 102 4 136 unknown unicast storm threshold 4 141 ports configuring 3 99 4 135 ports mirroring 3 120 4 157 power budgets port 3 129 4 163 port priority 3 131 4 163 priority default port ingress 3 186 4 235 problems troubleshooting B 1 protocol migration 3 150 4 186 Q QoS 4 243 queue weights 3 191 4 236 R RADIUS logon authentication 3 55 4 80 rate limits setting 3 121 4 159 remote logging 4 42 restarting the system 4 13 RSTP 3 136 4 171 global configuration
411. ltiple spanning tree MST 4 178 revision oe the revision number for the multiple spanning MST 4 178 ree 4 169 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 15 Spanning Tree Commands Continued configuration Command Function Mode Page max hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST 4 179 region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4 179 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface IC 4 180 spanning tree port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC 4 181 spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 182 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 183 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP IC 4 184 spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST IC 4 185 spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance in the MST IC 4 186 port priority spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 186 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE 4 187 spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration PE 4 189 spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for
412. ly Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 4 193 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 19 port channel channel id Range 1 12 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join Timer 20 centiseconds Leave Timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall Timer 1000 centiseconds Console 4 193 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands garp timer 4 192 Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 1 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add change and delete VLANs GC 4 194 vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name and state VC 4 195 vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define t
413. m Broadcast Storm Multicast Storm Multicast Storm Unknown Unicast Unknown Unicast Flow Control LACP Port Security Max MAC Count Port Security Action Media Type Current Status Link Status Port Operation Status Operation Speed duplex Flow Control Type Console Limit Limit Storm Storm Limit Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 1000T 00 16 B6 F0 3B EE Up Auto 10half Enabled 64 Kbits second Disabled 64 Kbits second Disabled 64 Kbits second Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 None None 10full 100half 100full Up Up 100full None 4 143 1000full Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Usage e The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Auto negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE T port or trunk If not used the success of the link process cannot be guaranteed e When using auto negotiation the optimal settings will be negotiated between the link partners based on their advertised capabilities To set the speed duplex mode or flow control under auto negotiation the required operation modes must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Command Attributes e Name Allows you to
414. m permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error 3 123 Configuring the Switch Table 3 7 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersi
415. management access GC 4 107 show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser PE 4 108 management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group e telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group e start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will acc
416. mand sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx timeout quiet period 350 Console config if 4 102 Authentication Commands 4 dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period 30
417. mask for MAC address in hexidecimal format e vid VLAN ID Range 1 4093 e vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list e The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 128 25 For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 4 130 Access Control List Commands 4 show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 129 mac access group 4 131 mac a
418. mes Interactive Timeout Disabled Login Timeout Disabled Silent Time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity None Stopbits 1 Console Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access via Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes e Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch Default 23 e Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 seconds e Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon att
419. mic entries configured with DHCP Snooping commands see page 4 115 e static Shows static entries configured with the ip source guard binding command see page 4 113 4 114 Client Security Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip source guard binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static 1 Eth 1 5 Console DHCP Snooping Commands DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port This section describes commands used to configure DHCP snooping Table 4 3 DHCP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping globally GC 4 115 ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN GC 4 117 vlan ip dhcp snooping Configures the specified interface as trusted IC 4 118 trust ip dhcp snooping Verifies the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet GC 4 119 verify mac address against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP Option 82 information relay GC 4 120 information option ip dhcp snooping Specifies how to handle DHCP client requests which already GC 4 121 information policy contain Option 82 information show ip dhcp Shows the DHCP
420. milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class18 Output queue buffer Range 0 3 where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue 18 CLI shows Queue ID 3 188 Class of Service Configuration Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class o f 03 1 0 0 3 2 0 0 3 3 ff 0 3 4 P 03 5 2 0 3 6 B 0 3 7 B 0 3 Figure 3 93 Configuring Traffic Classes CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 4 237 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console config exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 239 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01234 12 5 Priority Queue 0 1 2 2 Wo 7 3 Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 189 Configuring the Switch Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on
421. mmand Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset e The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit O means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any e The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 17 1 Learned Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Delete on reset Console mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information 4 168 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Example Console config
422. mmand to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 137 capabilities 4 138 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 137 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Auto negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE T port or trunk If not used the success of the link process cannot be guaranteed e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 1
423. mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 12 CF 49 5e dc Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine port control auto re authentication State Request Count Identifier Server Idle 0 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 24 Console timeout quiet period 30 timeout re authperiod 1800 timeout tx period 40 Mode ForceAuthorized Auto ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized 4 135 4 100 4 102 4 99 4 102 4 103 4 103 4 104 Authorized yes yes n a n a 3 73 Configuring the Switch Displaying 802 1X Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 3 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EXPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response
424. mp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 258 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Command Usage e The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Rela
425. mple Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot3 tlv mac phy Console config if 4 225 4 Command Line Interface IIdp dot3 tlv max frame This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its maximum frame size Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot3 tlv max frame Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Refer to Frame Size Commands on page 4 22 for information on configuring the maximum frame size for the switch Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot3 tlv maximum frame size Console config if IIdp dot3 tlv poe This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its Power over Ethernet PoE capabilities Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot3 tlv power via mdi Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises Power over Ethernet capabilities including whether or not PoE is supported currently enabled if the port pins through which power is delivered can be controlled the port pins selected to deliver power and the power class Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot3 tlv poe Console config if 4 226 LLDP Commands 4 Ildp medtlv extpoe This command configures an LLDP MED
426. mporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC 11 STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN boundaries 3 141 Configuring the Switch address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a
427. mware supports only the EAP MD5 3 69 Configuring the Switch authentication type Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides client authentication Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X Web Click Security 802 1X Information 802 1X Information Figure 3 35 802 1X Global Information CLI This example shows the default global setting for 802 1X Console show dot1x 4 104 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control Disabled 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 28 Console 3 70 User Authentication Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication The 802 1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X Default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration Enable dot1x globally for the switch and click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X System Authentication Control Vv Enabled Figure 3 36 802 1X Global Configuration CLI
428. n LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers This information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology Table 4 1 LLDP Commands Command Function Mode Page dp Enables LLDP globally on the switch GC 4 214 dp holdtime multiplier Configures the time to live TTL value sentin LLDP GC 4 214 advertisements dp medFastStartCount Configures how many medFastStart packets are GC 4 215 transmitted dp notification interval Configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP GC 4 215 notifications about LLDP changes dp ref
429. n Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 148 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Main Menu Menu Description Page MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 3 151 VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance 3 151 Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST instance 3 154 Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 154 Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 3 155 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 155 VLAN 3 157 802 1Q VLAN 3 157 GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 3 160 Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this 3 160 switch Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether 3 161 or not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 162 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 164 Static Membership by Port Configures membership type for interfaces including tagged 3 165 untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 166 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3 166 Private VLAN 3 168 Information Shows private VLANs and associated ports 3 169 Configuration Creates removes primary or community VLANs 3 170
430. n id mrouter interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config 4 260 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan vian ia vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type
431. n this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region e Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance e Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs e Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0000ABCD0000 Bridge ID 32768 0000ABCDO0000 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d 0 hO min 35 s Figure 3 73 STA Information 3 139 Configuring the Switch CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree 4 18
432. nabled Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 1443 Copy HTTPS Certificate TFTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Source Certificate File Name I Source Private File Name Private Password Copy Certificate Figure 3 31 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 86 Console config ip http secure port 441 4 87 Console config exit Console copy tftp https certificate 4 24 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Console 3 60 User Authentication Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses al
433. nagement access to a switch Table 4 31 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 83 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network port GC 4 84 tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 84 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 85 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 4 83 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces
434. ncel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands 4 5 4 Command Line Interface Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Class Map Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree Policy Map VLAN Database
435. nction allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into the network Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 4 10 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port IC 4 159 rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output rate no rate limit input output e input Input rate output Output rate e rate Maximum rate Range 64 1000000 Kbps Default Setting Disabled 1000000 Kbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 159 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 600 Console config if Related Command show interfaces switchport 4 145 Power over Ethernet Commands The commands in
436. nd Line Interface Default Setting Broadcast Storm Control Enabled packet rate limit 64 kilobits per second Multicast Storm Control Disabled Unknown Unicast Storm Control Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When traffic exceeds the threshold specified for broadcast and multicast or unknown unicast traffic packets exceeding the threshold are dropped until the rate falls back down beneath the threshold Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 kilobits per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset 4 142 Interface Commands 4 Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console show interfaces stat
437. nd Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 4 172 spanning tree max age 4 173 spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 173 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 4 172 spanning tree hello time 4 1
438. nds Table 4 24 show snmp group display description Continued 4 storage type Field Description readview The associated read view writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read and a Write View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server user username groupname remote jp address v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha auth password priv des56 priv password no snmp server user username v1 v2c v3 remote username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device jp address The Internet address of the remote device v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input e auth Uses SNMPv3 with authentication md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication e auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minimum of eight characters is required e priv des56 Uses SNMPv3 with 56 bit DES data encryption priv passwo
439. nfig radius server 1 host 192 168 1 25 4 80 Console config exit Console show radius server 4 82 Remote RADIUS Server Configuration Global Settings Communication Key with RADIUS Server Auth Port 181 Retransmit Times 5 Request Timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP Address 192 168 1 25 Communication Key with RADIUS Server Auth Port 181 Retransmit Times 5 Request Timeout 10 Console config config Console config authentication login tacacs 4 78 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 4 83 Console config tacacs server port 200 4 84 Console config tacacs server key green 4 84 Console config exit Console show tacacs server 4 85 Remote TACACS server configuration Global Settings Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage e Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port e If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number 3 58 User Authentication e When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and serve
440. nfigured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6 Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5 while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated with VLAN 6 This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport mode private vlan promiscuous 4 205 Console config if switchport private vlan mapping 5 4 207 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host 4 205 Console config if switchport private vlan host association 6 4 206 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport mode private vlan host Console config if switchport private vlan host association 6 Console config if Configuring Protocol VLANs You can configure VLAN behavior to support multiple protocols to allow traffic to pass through different VLANS When a packet is received at a port its VLAN membership is determined by the protocol type of the packet Configuring Basic Protocol VLAN Settings Use the Protocol VLAN Configuration menu to create or remove protocol VLANs Command Attributes e Protocol Group IP Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group Range 1 2147483647 e Frame Type Choose either Ethernet RFC 1042 or LLC Other as the frame type used by this protocol e Protoco
441. nfirm that you want to reset the switch Console reload 4 13 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 3 34 Basic Configuration Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 52 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to specific time servers Command Attributes SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16384 seconds Default 16 seconds SNTP Server Sets the IP address
442. ng adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured e Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the DSCP field in the IP frame When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Quality of Service Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values 1 4 System Defaults 1 or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on network policies diffe
443. ng table Use the SIP MAC option to check these same parameters plus the source MAC address If no matching entry is found the packet is dropped e When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping see DHCP Snooping Configuration on page 3 90 or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table e lf the IP source guard is enabled an inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option will be checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet will be dropped e Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe DHCP snooping is disabled see page 3 90 IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding the packet will be forwarded Ifthe DHCP snooping is enabled IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding the packet will be forwarded If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings have not yet been configured neither by static configuration in the IP source guard binding table nor dyn
444. nimum Abbreviation 4 3 Command Completion 4 3 Getting Help on Commands 4 3 Showing Commands 4 4 Partial Keyword Lookup 4 5 Negating the Effect of Commands 4 5 Using Command History 4 5 Understanding Command Modes 4 6 Exec Commands 4 6 Configuration Commands 4 7 Command Line Processing 4 8 Command Groups 4 9 General Commands 4 10 enable 4 10 disable 4 11 Vv Contents vi configure show history reload prompt end exit quit System Management Commands Device Designation Commands hostname System Status Commands show startup config show running config show system show users show version Frame Size Commands jumbo frame File Management Commands copy delete dir whichboot boot system Line Commands line login password timeout login response exec timeout password thresh silent time databits parity speed stopbits disconnect show line Event Logging Commands logging on logging history logging host logging facility logging trap clear log 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 15 4 15 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 41 4 42 4 42 Contents show logging 4 43 show log 4 44 SMTP Alert Commands 4 45 logging sendmail host 4 45 logging sendmail level 4 46 logging sendmail source email 4 46 logging sendmail destination email 4 47
445. ning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst instance_id port priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree e Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree protocol migration 4 186 spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id R
446. nknown or unsupported protocol Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters 3 122 Port Configuration Table 3 7 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Er
447. nooping Information Option Configuration DHCP Snooping Port Configuration Port Trust Status Trunk 1 I Enabled 2 Tenabled 3 D Enabled 4 I Enabled 5 M Enabled gt Figure 3 49 DHCP Snooping Port Configuration 3 93 Configuring the Switch CLI This example sets port 5 as a trusted interface Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip dhcp snooping trust 4 118 Console config if end Console show ip dhcp snooping Global DHCP Snooping status disable DHCP Snooping Information Option Status disable DHCP Snooping Information Policy replace DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs Verify Source Mac Address enable Interface Trusted Eth 1 1 No Eth 1 2 No Eth 1 3 No Eth 1 4 No Eth 1 5 Yes Displaying DHCP Snooping Binding Information Binding table entries can be displayed on the Binding Information page Command Attributes e No Table entry for DHCP snooping binding information e Unit Stack unit e Port Port number e VLAN ID ID of a configured VLAN e MAC Address A valid unicast MAC address IP Address A valid unicast IP address IP Address Type Indicates an Pv4 or IPv6 address type e Lease Time Seconds The time after which an entry is removed from the table Web Click DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping Binding Information DHCP Snooping Binding Information No Unit Port
448. ns with other systems Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel admin key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that j
449. nt station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Table 4 35 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 91 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4 92 ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4 93 authentication retries ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 93 copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 4 24 delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 94 ip ssh crypto host key Generates the host key PE 4 94 generate ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4 95 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4 95 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 37 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE 4 96 for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 96 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 4 97 show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and public key type PE 4 20 Configuration Guidelines The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client t
450. ntact Geoff Console config exit Console show system System Description Gigabit PoE Switch System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 1 7 System Information System Up Time 0 days 0 hours System Name R amp D 5 System Location we 9 System Contact Geoff MAC Address Unit1 00 00 35 28 00 03 Web Server Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled POST Result DUMMY Teet L os iecsseiecdvs edit Sedans ase PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TOSE sid ayaa eke ce Oo AO ae PASS Tiner TORR deseret ERENS ENa PASS Done All Pass Console 7 minutes 24 port 10 100 1000 2 port mini GBIC and 22 65 seconds 3 12 Basic Configuration Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch e Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports and expansion ports e Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board e Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Management Software e EPLD Version Version number of the Electronically Programmable Logic Device code e Loader Version Version number of loader co
451. nterval specified by the Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled e Max Req Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 e Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds e Re authen Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds e Tx Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Authorized e Yes Connected client is authorized e No Connected client is not authorized e Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port e Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client e Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration Modify the parameters required and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Operation Max Count Re Quiev Re p j Port Status Ohara 120 Mode auton M R29 poriog mien Tx Par
452. nts 0 Jabbers 0 CRC Align Errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet Size lt 64 Octets 21619 Packet Size 65 to 127 Octets 1953 Packet Size 128 to 255 Octets 1698 Packet Size 256 to 511 Octets 585 Packet Size 512 to 1023 Octets 1526 Packet Size 1024 to 1518 Octets 20587 Console show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows all interfaces 4 145 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 24 Broadcast Threshold Multicast Threshold Unknown unicast Threshold LACP Status Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit VLAN Membership Mode Ingress Rule Acceptable Frame Type Native VLAN GVRP Status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN Mode Private VLAN Mapping Priority for Untagged Traffic Private VLAN host association Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 24 Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 1000000 Kbits per second Disabled 1000000 Kbits per second Hybrid Enabled All frames 1 0 Disabled
453. o specified syslog servers Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 40 logging trap 4 42 clear log 4 42 4 39 4 Command Line Interface logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram eve no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Table 4 14 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 warnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 Command Mode Global
454. o not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 76 Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local RADIUS Settings Global Sererlndex C1 C2 C3 CH CH Server Port Number 1 65535 181 Secret Text String a Number of Server Transmits 1 30 5 Timeout for a reply 1 65535 10 sec TACACS Settings Server IP Address 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number 1 65535 49 Secret Text String Figure 3 30 Authentication Settings 3 57 Configuring the Switch CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Remote TACACS Server Configuration Console Server IP Address 10 20 30 40 Communication Key with TACACS Server Server Port Number 200 Retransmit Times 2 Request Times 5 Console config authentication login radius 4 78 Console config radius server port 181 4 81 Console config radius server key green 4 81 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 82 Console config radius server timeout 10 4 82 Console co
455. obin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Port IP DSCP Quality of Service DiffServ supports class maps policy maps and service policies A 1 A Software Specifications Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Additional Features BOOTP client SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 2005 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Full duplex flow control ISO IEC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging DHCP Client RFC 2131 HTTPS ICMP RFC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 IPv4 IGMP RFC 3228 A 2 Management Information Bases A RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON RFC 2819 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 1157 SNM
456. ocal SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console 4 68 SNMP Commands 4 Table 4 22 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP enginelD String identifying the local engine ID Local SNMP The number of times that the engine has re initialized since the snmp engineBoots EnginelD was last configured Remote SNMP String identifying an engine ID on a remote device enginelD IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine snmp server view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples e included Defines an included view excluded Defines an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access
457. ode configuration mode and other basic functions Table 4 5 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 10 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 11 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 12 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 12 reload Restarts the system PE 4 13 prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC 4 13 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 14 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 4 14 quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 14 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion context sensitive any NA enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Syntax enable eve level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 4 10 General Commands 4 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 77 The c
458. odes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol e Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before en
459. of Service Configuring Quality of Service Parameters Configuring a Class Map Creating QoS Policies Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues 3 155 3 157 3 157 3 157 3 159 3 160 3 160 3 161 3 162 3 164 3 165 3 166 3 168 3 169 3 170 3 171 3 172 3 173 3 174 3 174 3 175 3 176 3 176 3 178 3 181 3 182 3 183 3 184 3 185 3 186 3 186 3 186 3 188 3 190 3 191 3 192 3 192 3 192 3 192 3 194 3 195 3 195 3 198 3 201 Contents Multicast Filtering 3 202 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 3 203 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 204 Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave 3 206 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 207 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 208 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 209 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 3 210 Multicast VLAN Registration 3 211 Configuring Global MVR Settings 3 212 Displaying MVR Interface Status 3 214 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups 3 215 Configuring MVR Interfaces 3 216 Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces 3 217 Switch Clustering 3 219 Cluster Configuration 3 219 Cluster Member Configuration 3 221 Cluster Member Information 3 222 Cluster Candidate Information 3 223 UPnP 3 224 UPnP Configuration 3 225 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 4 1 Accessing the CLI 4 1 Console Connection 4 1 Telnet Connection 4 1 Entering Commands 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 4 3 Mi
460. of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these service is enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner e The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority Selecting IP DSCP Priority The switch allows you to enable or disable IP DSCP priority Command Attributes Disabled Disables IP DSCP priority service This is the default setting IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Status Select IP DSCP then click Apply IP DSCP Priority Status IP DSCP Priority Status Disabled Figure 3 96 IP DSCP Priority Status Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of f
461. ograms automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it e The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it 4 94 Authentication Commands 4 Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 95 ip ssh save host key 4 95 ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 94 ip ssh save host key 4 95 no ip ssh server 4 91 ip ssh save host key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key 4 95 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console
462. oined the group 4 151 4 Command Line Interface Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key i
463. om the Interface field and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups Select a multicast address from the displayed lists and click the Add or Remove button to modify the Member list MVR Static Group Member Interface Pot 1 O Trunk he Member Non Member 228 1 23 1 228 1 23 2 228 1 23 3 228 1 23 4 228 1235 228 1 23 6 Figure 3 111 MVR Group Member Configuration CLI This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr group 228 1 23 1 4 263 Console config if 3 218 Switch Clustering Switch Clustering Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together for centralized management through a single unit Switches that support clustering can be grouped together regardless of physical location or switch type as long as they are connected to the same local network Command Usage e A switch cluster has a Commander unit that is used to manage all other Member switches in the cluster The management station uses both Telnet and the web interface to communicate directly with the Commander through its IP address while the Commander manages Member switches using the cluster s internal IP addresses e Cluster switches are limited to within a single IP subnet Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander it automatically discovers other cluster enabled swit
464. oming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c set This command services IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified by the match command on page 4 245 Use the no form to remove the traffic classification Syntax no set cos new cos ip dscp new dscp new cos New Class of Service CoS value Range 0 7 e new dscp New Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration 4 247 4 Command Line Interface Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 10000
465. ommand displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 48 trap Displays settings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example 4 The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 and the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level debugging Console Table 4 15 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in FLASH The message level s reported based on the logging history command History logging in RAM The message level s reported based on the logging history command 4 43 4 Command Line Interface The following example displays settings for the
466. ommand specifies the number of MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism Syntax lidp medfaststartcount packets seconds Number of packets Range 1 10 packets Default 4 packets Default Setting 4 packets Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The MEDFastStartCount parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port LLDP MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service Example Console config lldp medfaststartcount 6 Console config lldp notification interval This command configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP notifications about LLDP MIB changes Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lidp notification interval seconds no Ildp notification interval seconds Specifies the periodic interval at which SNMP notifications are sent Range 5 3600 seconds Default Setting 5 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 215 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e This parameter only applies to SNMP applications which use data stored in the LLDP MIB for network monitoring or management e Information about changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP notifications is not transmitted Only state changes that exist at the time of a notification are include
467. ommand to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command e The authentication link up and link down traps are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the snmp server group command page 4 71 Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 64 snmp server engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the default Syntax snmp server engine id local remote p address engineid string no snmp server engine id local remote address local Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device jp address The Internet address of the remote device engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 1 26 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration 4 67 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engin
468. on Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 e Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch e Restart DHCP Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN 1 IP Address Mode Static v IP Address 192 168 1 54 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 Manual IP Configuration Basic Configuration CLI Specify the management interfac
469. on page 4 60 Managing System Files The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program Web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system If the system is booted with the factory default settings the master unit will also create a file named startup1 cfg that contains system settings for initialization including information about the unit identifier and MAC address The configuration settings from the factory defaults configuration file are copied to this file which is then used to boot the switch See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 33 23 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and Web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 33 20 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also
470. on volatile memory 4 16 System Management Commands 4 e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by information Users names and access levels SNTP server settings SNMP community strings VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for the switch Spanning tree settings Interface settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486f 05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7al 783edd 27d254ca snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp line console 1 line vty end Console Related Commands show running config 4 18 4 17 4 Command Line Interface show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command
471. onfig Specify the desired power budget for the switch Click Apply Power Configuration Power Allocation 37 180 iso watts Figure 3 67 Setting the Switch Power Budget CLI This example sets the PoE power budget for the switch to the maximum level Console config power mainpower maximum allocation 180 4 160 Console config Displaying Port Power Status Use the Power Port Status page to display the current PoE power status for all ports Command Attributes Port The port number e Admin Status The administrative status of POE power on the port e Mode The current operating status of PoE power on the port e Power Allocation The configured power budget for the port e Power Consumption The current power consumption on the port e Priority The port s configured power priority setting 3 129 Configuring the Switch Web Click PoE Power Port Status Power Port Status Port Admin Status Mode Powar ames daar Consumption Priority milliwatts milliwatts 1 Enabled off 15400 0 low 2 Enabled off 15400 0 low 3 Enabled off 15400 0 low 4 Enabled off 15400 0 low 5 Enabled off 15400 0 low gt Figure 3 68 Displaying Port PoE Status CLI This example displays the PoE status and priority of port 1 Console show power inline status 4 164 Interface Admin Oper Power mWatt Power used Priority Eth 1 1 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 2
472. onfig if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if no power inline Console config if 4 162 Power over Ethernet Commands 4 power inline maximum allocation This command limits the power allocated to specific ports Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax power inline maximum allocation milliwatts no power inline maximum allocation milliwatts The maximum power budget for the port Range 3000 15400 milliwatts Default Setting 15400 milliwatts Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage If a device is connected to a switch port and the switch detects that it requires more than the maximum power allocated to the port no power is supplied to the device i e port power remains off Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if power inline maximum allocation 8000 Console config if power inline priority This command sets the power priority for specific ports Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax power inline priority priority no power inline priority priority The power priority for the port Options 1 critical 2 high or 3 low Default Setting 3 low Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 163 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Ifthe power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to control the su
473. ong with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Notes 1 You need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol 2 The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication Settings page page 3 55 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwi
474. onnecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group 3 45 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete To change the assigned group of a user click Change G
475. ons in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 3 4 Default CoS Priority Levels Priority 1 2 0 3 45 6 7 Queue 0 1 2 3 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port e This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces 4 237 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 01 2 Priority Queue 0 1 2 Console Related Commands show queue cos map 4 239 show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue mode Queue Mode wrr Console show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the four priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 238 Class of Service Commands 4 Example Console show queue bandwidth Queue ID Weight Console show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos
476. onsole config username bob password 0 smith Console config 4 76 Authentication Commands 4 enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level eve 0 7 password no enable password level eve e level eve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 10 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enabl
477. op Drops out of conformance traffic Add Adds specified criteria to the policy map 3 199 Configuring the Switch Web Click QoS DiffServ Policy Map to display the list of existing policy maps To add a new policy map click Add Policy To configure the policy rule settings click Edit Classes Policy Map Modify Name amp Description Edit Classes Add Policy Remove Policy Policy Name Description m p ReD service for r rd_policy 2 R D service for T ee Policy Configuration Policy Name ra_policy s R amp D service for VL 1 eel ee Description Policy Rule Settings Policy Name rd_policy 3 Meter cmename aston sai a Remove Class Class Name rd_class 3 z Figure 3 99 Configuring Policy Maps 3 200 Quality of Service CLI This example creates a policy map called rd policy sets the average bandwidth the 1 Mbps the burst rate to 1522 bps and the response to reduce the DSCP value for violating packets to 0 Console config policy map rd_policy 3 4 246 Console config pmap class rd_class 3 4 246 Console config pmap c set ip dscp 4 4 247 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action set ip dscp 0 4 248 Console config pmap c Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues This function binds a policy map to the ingress queue of a particular interface Command Usage You must
478. or connected devices and a per port power priority can be set so that the switch never exceeds its allocated power budget When a device is connected to a switch port its power requirements are detected by the switch before power is supplied If the power required by a device exceeds the power budget of the port or the whole switch power is not supplied Ports can be set to one of three power priority levels critical high or low To control the power supply within the switch s budget ports set at critical or high priority have power enabled in preference to those ports set at low priority For example when a device is connected to a port set to critical priority the switch supplies the required power if necessary by dropping power to ports set for a lower priority If power is dropped to some low priority ports and later the power demands on the switch fall back within its budget the dropped power is automatically restored Switch Power Status Use the Main Power Status page to display the Power over Ethernet settings for the switch Command Attributes Maximum Available Power The configured power budget for the switch e System Operation Status The PoE power service provided to the switch ports Mainpower Consumption The amount of power being consumed by PoE devices connected to the switch Thermal Temperature The internal temperature of the switch Software Version The version of software running on
479. or multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x e MVR source ports should be configured as members of the MVR VLAN using the switchport allowed vlan command page 4 200 and switchport native vlan command page 4 199 but MVR receiver ports should not be statically configured as members of this VLAN e IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 4 253 Note that only 4 262 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 IGMPv1 v2 multicast report messages or IGMPv2 leave messages sent by IGMPv1 v2 hosts are supported by the current MVR standard IGMP snooping and MVR share a maximum number of 255 groups Any multicast streams received in excess of this limitation will be flooded to all ports in the associated VLAN Example The following example enables MVR globally designates the MVR VLAN as VLAN 1 and configures a range of MVR group addresses Console Console Console Console config mvr config mvr vlan 1 config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 config mvr Interface Configuration This command configures an interface as a static member of an MVR group using the group keyword or configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port using the type keyword Use the no form to restore the default settings Syntax no mvr group jp address type receiver source e
480. ork resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication E Protocol over LANs EAPOL to exchange authentication 8021X client protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS aiaa AAR SSE FARA 1 Client attempts to access a switch port authentication server to verify 2 Switch sends client an identity request i A RADIUS 3 Client sends back identity information user identity and access RADIE 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server g 5 Authentication server challenges client rights When a client i e 6 Client responds with proper credentials Supplicant connects to a 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides
481. ormation The address table supports up to 8K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 1 5 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol provides loop detection When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if 1 Introduction the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 3 to 5 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring por
482. ormation in the client s request with information about the relay agent itself insert the relay agent s address when DHCP snooping is enabled and unicast the packet to the DHCP server Default Setting replace Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include DHCP Option 82 information the switch can be configured to set the action policy for these packets Either the switch can drop the DHCP packets keep the existing information or replace it with the switch s relay information Example Console config ip dhcp snooping information policy drop Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping information option 4 120 ip dhcp snooping 4 115 show ip dhcp snooping This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 121 4 Command Line Interface Example 1 Eth 1 2 No Eth 1 3 No Eth 1 4 No Eth 1 5 Yes Console show ip dhcp snooping Global DHCP Snooping status disable DHCP Snooping Information Option Status disable DHCP Snooping Information Policy replace DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs Verify Source Mac Address enable Interface Trusted show ip dhcp snooping binding This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type VL
483. ort see power inline on page 4 162 Oper The current operating power status displays on or off Power mWatt The maximum power allocated to this port see power inline maximum allocation on page 4 163 Power used The current power consumption on the port in milliwatts Priority The port s power priority setting see power inline priority on page 4 163 show power mainpower Use this command to display the current power status for the switch Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show power mainpower Unit 1 Mainpower Status Maximum Available Power 180 watts System Operation Status on Mainpower Consumption 15 watts Software Version Version 0x0122 Build 0x15 Console Table 4 13 show power mainpower parameters Parameter Description Maximum Available Power The available power budget for the switch see power mainpower maximum allocation on page 4 160 System Operation Status The current operating power status displays on or off Mainpower Consumption The current power consumption on the switch in watts Software Version The version of software running on the PoE controller subsystem in the switch 4 165 4 Command Line Interface Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 14 Address Table Commands
484. ort Information MVR Group IP Information MVR Port Configuration MVR Group Member Configuration Cluster Configuration Cluster Member Configuration Cluster Member Information Cluster Candidate Information UPnP Configuration Figures 3 165 3 166 3 168 3 169 3 170 3 171 3 172 3 173 3 175 3 175 3 177 3 180 3 181 3 182 3 183 3 184 3 185 3 187 3 189 3 190 3 191 3 192 3 193 3 197 3 200 3 201 3 205 3 206 3 207 3 208 3 209 3 210 3 213 3 214 3 215 3 217 3 218 3 220 3 221 3 222 3 223 3 225 Figures xxii Chapter 1 Introduction This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup and Restore Backup to TFTP server Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP v1 v2c Community strings SNMP version 3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 256 ACLs 60 rules per ACL DHCP Client Supported Port Configuration S
485. ort priority default queue bandwidth queue cos map show queue mode show queue bandwidth show queue cos map Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 map ip dscp Global Configuration map ip dscp Interface Configuration show map ip dscp Quality of Service Commands class map match policy map class set police service policy show class map show policy map show policy map interface Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands ip igmp snooping ip igmp snooping vlan static ip igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping immediate leave show ip igmp snooping show mac address table multicast IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 ip igmp snooping querier ip igmp snooping query count ip igmp snooping query interval ip igmp snooping query max response time ip igmp snooping router port expire time Static Multicast Routing Commands ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter show ip igmp snooping mrouter Multicast VLAN Registration Commands mvr Global Configuration mvr Interface Configuration mvr immediate Contents 4 234 4 234 4 234 4 235 4 236 4 237 4 238 4 238 4 239 4 240 Contents show mvr 4 265 show mvr interface 4 266 show mvr members 4 267 IP Interface Commands 4 268 Basic IP Configuration 4 268 ip address 4 268 ip default gateway 4 269 ip dhcp restart 4 270 show ip interface 4 271 show ip redirects 4 271 ping 4 272 Appendix A Software Specifications A 1 Software Features A 1 Management Features A 2 Standards A 2
486. ort receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port e Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only 3 146 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled e External path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the preceding item e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device e Fast forwarding This field provides the same in
487. orwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 3 192 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Table 3 3 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 0 8 1 10 12 14 16 2 18 20 22 24 3 26 28 30 32 34 36 4 38 40 42 5 48 6 46 56 7 Command Attributes e DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DScPO Ccoso0 B DSCP1 CoS 0 DSCP 2 CoS 0 DSCP Priority Table DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoSO Class of Service Value 0 7 1 Restore Default Figure 3 97 Mapping IP DSCP Priority to Class of Service Values 3 193 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 4 240 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 241 Console config if end Console show ma
488. ory Flash 3 63 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key z IDSA Host Key Type Both F Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Generate Clear Figure 3 32 SSH Host Key Settings CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 94 Console ip ssh save host key 4 95 Console show public key host 4 97 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739631403 3869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368414232759121 2760325919683 697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642 025190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6 zwIlqCqDb3 869j YVX1ME1SHLOEcE Re6hlasfEthIwmjhLY400j quZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka Py9ieGwO8 f2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO 9XTS7XKc05xfzkBikviDa 20r1z6UK 6vFOgvUDFed1nixYTVo h5v8r0ea2rpn06DkZAAAAF QCNZn x17dwpW8Rrv DOnSWw4Q0k 6QAAATEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4g UOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO9OGRPUMbCAkCC uzxat0o7drnIZypMx Sx5RUGMGgKS 9ywsalcWqHe FY5ilc31DCNBueeLykZzVS RStazTKIk zrJh8GL
489. ound in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned e Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses 3 133 Configuring the Switch Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by F Interface Port 1 gt C Trunk 2 I MAC Address F VLAN fi gt Address Table Sart Key Address v Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 71 Displaying the MAC Dynamic Address Table CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 167 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console 3 13
490. ource Guard on page 3 95 e DHCP Snooping Filters IP traffic on unsecure ports for which the source address cannot be identified via DHCP snooping nor static source bindings See DHCP Snooping on page 3 88 Note The priority of execution for the filtering commands is Port Security Access Control Lists IP Source Guard and then DHCP Snooping Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 10 1 When the port has reached 3 78 Client Security the maximum number
491. ource email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None 4 46 System Management Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 47 4 Command Line Interface Example Console
492. ow to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 141 4 196 VLAN Commands 4 switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode hybrid access trunk no switchport mode e hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames access Specifies an access VLAN interface The port transmits and receives untagged frames only e trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 197 switchport acceptable frame types This comm
493. p Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console 3 75 Configuring the Switch Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and
494. p device Console config 4 58 System Management Commands 4 upnp device ttl This command sets the time to live TTL value for sending of UPnP messages from the switch Syntax upnp device ttl value value The number of router hops a UPnP packet can travel before it is discarded Range 1 255 Default Setting 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage UPnP devices and control points must be within the local network that is within the TTL value for multicast messages Example In the following example sets the TTL to 6 hops Console config upnp device ttl 6 Console config upnp device advertise duration This command sets the duration for which the switch will advertise its presence on the local network Syntax upnp device advertise duration va ue value A time out value expressed in seconds Range 6 86400 seconds Default Setting 100 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example In the following example the advertise duration is set to 200 seconds Console config upnp device advertise duration 200 Console config 4 59 4 Command Line Interface show upnp This command displays the UPnP operational status and time out settings Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show upnp UPnP global settings Status Advertise duration eT Des Console Enabled 200 20 SNMP Commands Controls access to this sw
495. p dot1 tlv proto ident Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the 0 4 223 supported protocols dp dott tlv proto vid Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise port 0 4 223 related VLAN information dp dott tlv pvid Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its 0 4 224 default VLAN ID dp dot1 tlv vlan name Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its VLAN IC 4 224 name dp dot3 tlv link agg Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its link IC 4 225 aggregation capabilities dp dot3 tlv mac phy Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its MAC IC 4 225 and physical layer capabilities dp dot3 tlv max frame Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its C 4 226 maximum frame size dp dot3 tlv poe Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its 0 4 226 Power over Ethernet capabilities dp medtlv extpoe Configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its IC 4 227 extended Power over Ethernet configuration and usage information dp medtlv inventory Configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its IC 4 227 inventory identification details dp medtlv location Configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its IC 4 228 location identification details dp medtlv med cap Configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its IC 4 228 Media Endpoint Device capabilities dp medtlv network policy Configures an LLDP MED enabled port to advertise its IC 4 229 network policy configuration show Ildp config Shows L
496. p ip dscp ethernet 1 1 4 242 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Quality of Service The commands described in this section are used to configure Quality of Service QoS classification criteria and service policies Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on configured network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding All switches or routers that access the Internet rely on class information to provide the same forwarding treatment to packets in the same class Class information can be assigned by end hosts or switches or routers along the path Priority can then be assigned based on a general policy or a detailed examination of the packet However note that detailed examination of packets should take place close to the network edge so that core switches and routers are no
497. pecified policy 3 198 Quality of Service Back Returns to previous page without making any changes Policy Rule Settings Class Settings Class Name Name of class map Action Shows the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on 3 195 Meter The maximum throughput and burst rate Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Burst bytes Burst in bytes Exceed Action Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced Remove Class Deletes a class Policy Options Class Name Name of class map Action Configures the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on page 3 147 Range CoS 0 7 DSCP 0 63 Meter Check this to define the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower Burst bytes Burst in bytes Range 64 524288 Exceed Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate or burst will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced Set Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic Range 0 63 Dr
498. peed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Port Mirroring One port mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 8 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Control Supported Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store and Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Algorithm Supports standard STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based or private VLANs Traffic Prioritization Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling and Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP Qualify of Service Supports Differentiated Services DiffServ 1 1 1 Introduction Table 1 1 Key Features Continued Feature Description Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation
499. poe_fw1005 bix Operation Code Y 3489580 startup1 cfg Config File Y 4085 Console boot system This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of the configuration file or image name The colon is required Default Setting None 4 28 Command Mode System Management Commands 4 Global Configuration Command Usage A colon is required after the specified file type e If the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 27 whichboot 4 28 Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 12 Line Command Syntax These commands only apply to the serial port Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC 4 30 configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 30 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 31
500. pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode Commander mode must first be disabled Default 10 254 254 1 Number of Members The current number of Member switches in the cluster 3 219 Configuring the Switch Number of Candidates The current number of Candidate switches discovered in the network that are available to become Members Web Click Cluster Configuration Cluster Configuration Cluster Status M Enabled Cluster Commander M Enabled Role Commander Cluster IP Pool 10 2542541 Number of Members 1 Number of Candidates 2 Figure 3 112 Cluster Configuration CLI This example first enables clustering on the switch sets the switch as the cluster Commander and then configures the cluster IP pool Console config cluster 4 54 Console config cluster commander 4 54 Console config cluster ip pool 10 2 3 4 4 55 Console config 3 220 Switch Clustering Cluster Member Configuration Adds Candidate switches to the cluster as Members Command Attributes Member ID Specify a Member ID number for the selected Candidate switch Range 1 36 MAC Address Select a discovered switch MAC address from the Candidate Table or enter a specific MAC address of a known switch Web Click Cluster Member Configuration Cluster Member Configuration Current Cluster Member List New Cluster Member Member ID 1 36 l2 ol Candidate Table 00 12 CF 23 49 C0
501. ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP click Apply GVRP Status GVRP M Enable Figure 3 1 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 190 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Figure 3 77 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 15 Web Only 3 160 CLI Enter the following command VLAN Configuration Console show bridge ext Max support VLAN numbers Max support VLAN ID Static entry individual port VLAN learning Configurable PVID tagging Local VLAN capable Traf
502. pplied power For example A device connected to a low priority port that causes the switch to exceed its budget is not supplied power A device connected to a critical or high priority port that causes the switch to exceed its budget is supplied power but the switch drops power to one or more lower priority ports e Power is dropped from low priority ports in sequence starting from port number 1 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if power inline priority 2 Console config if Related Commands power mainpower maximum allocation 4 160 show power inline status This command displays the current power status for all ports or for specific ports Syntax show power inline status interface interface ethernet e unit Stack unit Range 1 e port Port number Range 1 24 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show power inline status Interface Admin Oper Power mWatt Power used Priority Eth 1 1 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 2 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 3 enable on 15400 7505 ow Eth 1 4 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 5 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 6 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 7 enable on 15400 8597 ow Eth 1 23 enable off 15400 0 ow Eth 1 24 enable off 15400 0 ow Console 4 164 Power over Ethernet Commands 4 Table 4 12 show power inline status parameters Parameter Description Admin The power mode set on the p
503. r defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Ot Po NS 3 81 Configuring the Switch Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name david Type Standard Add Figure 3 41 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard bill 4 123 Console config std
504. r frame type is ipx raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp rarp Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config protocol vian protocol group vian This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id vlan vian id no protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e vian id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4093 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Global Configuration 28 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 4 209 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames e Ifthe frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the fram
505. r negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data e The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection e A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above Netscape 6 2 or above and Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or above The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 2 HTTPS Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or later Windows 2000 Windows XP Linux Command Usage Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Note For m
506. r only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings Server Index Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters 3 56 User Authentication Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 e TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client D
507. ransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None 4 82 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Authentication Commands 4 Console show radius server Remote RADIUS Server Configuration Global Settings Auth Port Retransmit Times Request Timeout Server 1 Server IP Address Auth Port Retransmit Times Request Timeout Console Communication Key with RADIUS Server Communication Key with RADIUS Server KEKE 1812 192 168 1 1 KKKKK 1812 2 5 TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require ma
508. rap notifications to designated target stations at the interval specified by the Notification Interval in the preceding section Trap notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB IEEE 802 1AB the LLDP MED MIB ANSI TIA 1057 or vendor specific LLDP EXT DOT1 and LLDP EXT DOT3 MIBs For information on defining SNMP trap destinations see Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 40 Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP notifications is not transmitted Only state changes that exist at the time of a trap notification are included in the transmission An SNMP agent should therefore periodically check the value of IldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any IldpRemTablesChange notification events missed due to throttling or transmission loss e TLV Type Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages Port Description The port description is taken from the ifDescr object in RFC 2863 which includes information about the manufacturer the product name and the version of the interface hardware software System Description The system description is taken from the sysDescr object in RFC 3418 which includes the full name and version identification of the system s hardware type software operating system and networking software Management Address The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of
509. rce Destination Bit Mask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 e Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 e Control Code Bit Mask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 3 84 Client Security Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extended ACL Name mike i Destin
510. rd Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the password You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command 4 73 4 Command Line Interface e Before you configure a remote user use the snmp server engine id command page 4 67 to specify the engine ID for the remote device where the user resides Then use the snmp server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides The remote agent s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication privacy digests from the user s password If the remote engine ID is not first configured the snmp server user command specifying a remote user will fail SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Example Console config snmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console con
511. ream hosts request service from a specific source for a multicast service these sources are all placed in the Include list and traffic is forwarded to the hosts from each of these sources IGMPv3 hosts may also request that service be forwarded from all sources except for those specified In this case traffic is filtered from sources in the Exclude list and forwarded from all other available sources Notes 1 When the switch is configured to use IGMPv3 snooping the snooping version may be downgraded to version 2 or version 1 depending on the version of the IGMP query packets detected on each VLAN 2 IGMP snooping will not function unless a multicast router port is enabled on the switch This can accomplished in one of two ways A static router port can be manually configured see Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router on page 3 208 Using this method the router port is never timed out and will continue to function until explicitly removed The other method relies on the switch to dynamically create multicast routing ports whenever multicast routing protocol packets or IGMP query packets are detected ona port 3 A maximum of up to 255 multicast entries can be maintained for IGMP snooping and 255 entries for Multicast Routing when both of these features are enabled If the table s capacity is exceeded then IGMPv3 snooping will not support multicast source filtering but will forward multicast traffic from all relevant
512. receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 69 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 71 4 65 4 Command Line Interface To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 4 61 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 4 66 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 4 69 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 4 71 6 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 4 67 7 Then configure a remote user page 4 73 e The switch can send SNMP version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications e If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you sp
513. recommended path cost range is listed in Table 4 3 on page 4 180 The recommended path cost is listed in Table 4 4 on page 4 180 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 The default path costs are listed in Table 4 5 on page 4 181 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media Use the no spanning tree mst cost command to specify auto configuration mode Path cost takes precedence over interface priority Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 186 27 Use the spanning tree pathcost method command on page 4 175 to set the path cost method 4 185 4 Command Line Interface span
514. ree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding e Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if Spanning tree portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 182 4 183 4 Command Line Interface spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the dup
515. rent kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Multicast Filtering Multicast filtering is a system where network devices forward multicast traffic only to the ports that are registered with the multicast group Without mulicast filtering the data packet will be broadcast to all endstations within a LAN or VLAN The purpose is to keep the non multicast group members from receiving unsolicited packets and to prevent a possible reduction in network performance The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 23 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate 9600 Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin no password Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Exec Level Password super RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled
516. request PE 4 270 show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 271 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4 271 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network NE PE 4 272 ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address jp address IP address netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct 4 268 IP Interface Commands 4 the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program e If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP addre
517. resh interval Configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP GC 4 216 advertisements dp reinit delay Configures the delay before attempting to re initialize GC 4 217 after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down dp tx delay Configures a delay between the successive GC 4 217 transmission of advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables dp admin status Enables LLDP transmit receive or transmit and receive IC 4 218 mode on the specified port dp notification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications IC 4 218 about LLDP changes dp mednotification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications IC 4 219 about LLDP MED changes dp basic tlv Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the IC 4 220 management ip address management address for this device dp basic tlv Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its port IC 4 221 port description description system capabilities system capabilities 4 212 LLDP Commands 4 Table 4 1 LLDP Commands Vendor specific options may or may not be advertised by neighboring devices Command Function Mode Page lidp basic tlv Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the IC 4 222 system description system description lidp basic tlv system name Configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its IC 4 222 system name Ild
518. reshold for each port click Apply Port Broadcast Control For a 1 Gbps port the threshold range is 64 to 1000000 kilobits per second Port Type Protect Status Threshold 64 1000000 Trunk 1 1000Base TX I Enabled 64 kbits sec 2 1000Base TX I Enabled 64000 kbits sec 3 1000Base TX M Enabled 64 kbits sec 4 1000Base TX F Enabled 64 kbits sec 5 1000Base TX IZ Enabled 64 kbits sec 6 1000Base TX M Enabled C kbits sec 7 1000Base TX M Enabled eo kbits sec 8 1000Base TX F Enabled 64 _ kbits sec E Figure 3 62 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 500 packets per second for port 2 Console config if exit Console config exit Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast Threshold Multicast Threshold Unknown unicast Threshold LACP Status Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit VLAN Membership Mode Ingress Rule Acceptable Frame Type Native VLAN GVRP Status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN Mode Private VLAN Mapping Console Priority for Untagged Traffic Private VLAN host association Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if no switchport packet rate Console config broadcast packet rate 64000 Console show interfaces switchpor
519. ress Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays 4 166 current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 169 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN 4 189 groups also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs Link Layer Discovery Configures advertisement and learning of basic information about 4 212 Protocol neighboring devices Class of Service Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted 4 234 round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types and DSCP Quality of Service Configures Differentiated Services 4 243 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters specifies ports 4 252 attached to a multicast router and configures multicast VLAN registration IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 268 4 Command Line Interface The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations ACL Access Control List Configuration CM Class Map Configuration NE Normal Exec GC Global Configuration IC Interface Configuration General Commands LC Line Configuration MST Multiple Spanning Tree PE Privileged Exec PM Policy Map Configuration VC VLAN Database Configuration These commands are used to control the command access m
520. rol point is added to the network the UPnP discovery protocol allows that control point to search for UPnP enabled devices on the network Once a control point has discovered a device its next step is to learn more about the device and its capabilities by retrieving the device s description from the URL provided by the device in the discovery message After a control point has retrieved a description of the device it can send actions to the device s service To do this a control point sends a suitable control message to the discovered device s URL for the service provided in the device description When a device is known to the control point periodic event notification messages are sent A UPnP description for a service includes a list of actions to which the service responds and a list of variables that model the state of the service at run time If a device has a URL for presentation then the control point can retrieve a page from this URL load the page into a web browser and depending on the capabilities of the page allow a user to control the device and or view device status 3 224 UPnP UPnP Configuration The UPnP Configuration page allows you to enable or disable UPnP and to set advertisement and time out values Command Attributes UPNP Status Enables UPnP on the device Default Disabled e Advertising Duration The duration for which a device will advertise its status to the control point Range 60 8
521. ropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New lan1 Unit Portl1 Interface Por lt lt Add VLAN ID 1 7 Remove Port 12 Trunk gt Figure 3 104 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 260 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 261 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console 3 208 Multicast Filtering Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members Range 1 4094 e Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service
522. rors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximu
523. roup in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users er Name Group Name Model Level Authentication Privancy Actions DefaultROGroup v1 oAuthNoPriv None None Change Group n snmp users V3 authPriv MDs DESS6 Change Group authNoPriv MD5 None Change Group snmpyGusers v3 SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User User Name Group Name Security Model Security Level User Authentication User Name david Authentication Password Group N e thenticat IGroup Name T ication Passwor p aiaro Data Privacy _ L H Privacy Protocol Back Change Privacy Password Authentication Protocol Figure 3 26 Configuring SNMPv3 Users CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user chris group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4 73 Console config exit Console show snmp user 4 74 EngineId 80000034030001 488 5200000 User Name chris Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console 3 46 Simple Network Management Protocol Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and as
524. rt based VLAN 2 1 c oll 3 4 5 le z 8 GLi LE Ee Err rey LILLE eee CEL ae a 10 11 18 15 J 13 12 j 14 J 19 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID 3 159 Configuring the Switch Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on
525. rval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 GARP LeaveAIll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 16 Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer 3 167 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Fill in the requ
526. rvice level for traffic exceeding the specified rate 7 Use the Service Policy to assign a policy map to a specific interface Configuring a Class Map A class map is used for matching packets to a specified class Command Usage To configure a Class Map follow these steps Open the Class Map page and click Add Class When the Class Configuration page opens fill in the Class Name field and click Add When the Match Class Settings page opens specify type of traffic for this class based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN and click the Add button next to the field for the selected traffic criteria You can specify up to 16 items to match when assigning ingress traffic to a class map e The class map is used with a policy map to create a service policy for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Note that one or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map Command Attributes Class Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a class map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 64 characters for the description e Edit Rules Opens the Match Class Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page 3 195 Configuring the Switch Add Class Opens the Class Configuration page Enter a class name and description on
527. rwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled e Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled BPDU Flooding no informatio his attribute 3 150 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply a STA Port Configuration Port Spanning Tree STA State 0 ai tn te of 16 1 anenenene chat Admin Link Type eat Fara anA Migration BPDU Flooding Trunk 1 F Enabled Forwarding 128 o Auto Z F Enabled Enabled I Enable
528. s Default traps are used retries The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 seconds The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds e community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters 4 64 SNMP Commands 4 e version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps Range 1 2c 3 Default 1 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 3 37 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e port Host UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 Default Setting e Host Address None e Notification Type Traps e SNMP Version 1 UDP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at l
529. s including broadcast mode or 3 35 a specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 36 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 3 37 Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 3 39 Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP Agent Status 3 38 3 4 Table 3 2 Main Menu Continued Main Menu Menu Description Page SNMPv3 Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3 3 43 Engine ID Sets SNMPv3 Engine ID 3 43 Remote Engine ID Adds a Remote Engine ID and IP Host 3 44 Users Creates or deletes user accounts 3 45 Remote Users Creates or deletes remote user accounts 3 47 Groups Creates or deletes SNMPv3 Groups 3 49 Views Creates or deletes SNMPv3 Views 3 52 Security 3 54 User Accounts Assigns a new password for the current user 3 54 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence RADIUS and TACACS 3 55 HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 58 SSH Secure Shell 3 61 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 67 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and private 3 63 User Public Key Settings Copies the user key pair public and private 3 65 Port Security Configures per port security including status response for 3 78 security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1X Port authentication 3 69 Information Displays globa
530. s P Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering GMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Disabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled but no server defined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a Web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 22 4 The switch s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer 5 x or above Netscape 6 2 or above and Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or above The switch s web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports
531. s determined by the ip igmp snooping query max response time see page 4 258 If immediate leave is enabled the switch assumes that only one host is connected to the interface Therefore immediate leave should only be enabled on an interface if it is connected to only one IGMP enabled device either a service host or a neighbor running IGMP snooping e This command is only effective if IGMP snooping is enabled and IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 snooping is used Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave Console config if show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 204 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service Status Enabled Querier Status Disabled Leave proxy status Disabled Query Count 2 Query Interval 125 sec Query Max Response Time 10 sec Router Port Expire Time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Disabled on all VLAN IGMP Snooping Version Version 2 Console 4 255 4 Command Line Interface show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan vian ia user igmp snooping e vian id VLAN ID 1 to 4093 e user D
532. s of the TFTP server select config or opcode file type then enter the source and destination file names set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch Console tcopy tftp file 4 24 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name v1000 18 bix Destination file name V1 0 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V1 0 4 28 Console config exit Console reload 4 13 3 22 Basic Configuration Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes e File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration file to startup config Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file running config to startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Cop
533. s outside the local network or firewall to untrusted e When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 4 115 and enabled on a VLAN with ip dhcp snooping vlan command page 4 117 DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN according to the default status or as specifically configured for an interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command e When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed e Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted 4 118 Client Security Commands 4 Example This example sets port 5 to untrusted Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if no ip dhcp snooping trust Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 4 115 ip dhcp snooping vian 4 117 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address This command verifies the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If MAC address verification is enabled and the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client
534. s policy maps port Port characteristics power Show power protocol vlan Protocol VLAN information public key Public key information queue Priority queue information radius server RADIUS server information running config Information on the running configuration snmp Simple Network Management Protocol statistics sntp Simple Network Time Protocol configuration spanning tree Spanning tree configuration ssh Secure shell server connections startup config Startup system configuration system System information tacacs server TACACS server settings upnp UPnP settings users Information about terminal lines version System hardware and software versions vlan Virtual LAN settings Console show The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counters status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport Console 4 4 Entering Commands 4 Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords starting with s Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system Console show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to ca
535. s reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp admin key 3 Console config if 4 152 Link Aggregation Commands 4 lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority e If an active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 153 4 Command Line Interface show lacp This command disp
536. s switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to each of the data ports and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to the network Private VLANs and port based authentication using IEEE 802 1X are commonly used for these purposes In addition to these methods several other options of providing client security are supported by this switch These include port based authentication which can be configured for network client access by specifying a fixed set of MAC addresses The addresses assigned to DHCP clients can also be carefully controlled using static or dynamic bindings with the IP Source Guard and DHCP Snooping commands This switch provides client security using the following options e Private VLANs Provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN See Configuring Private VLANs on page 3 168 e 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports See Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication on page 3 69 e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports e ACL Access Control Lists provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type e IP Source Guard Filters untrusted DHCP messages on unsecure ports by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table See IP S
537. sable this feature Syntax no Ildp basic tlv port description Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The port description is taken from the ifDescr object in RFC 2863 which includes information about the manufacturer the product name and the version of the interface hardware software Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp basic tlv description Console config if IIldp basic tlv system capabilities This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its system capabilities Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp basic tlv system capabilities Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp basic tlv system capabilities Console config if 4 221 4 Command Line Interface Ildp basic tlv system description This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise the system description Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp basic tlv system description Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Ch
538. sabled Ingress Rate Limit Disabled 1000000 Kbits per second Egress Rate Limit Disabled 1000000 Kbits per second VLAN Membership Mode Hybrid Ingress Rule Enabled Acceptable Frame Type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for Untagged Traffic 0 GVRP Status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u 4093 t Forbidden VLAN Private VLAN Mode NONE Private VLAN host association NONE Private VLAN Mapping NONE Console 3 187 Configuring the Switch Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 1 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Priority 1 2 0 3 45 6 7 Queue 0 1 2 3 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 2 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background 2 Spare 0 default Best Effort 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Video less than 100
539. sages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on anon secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped 3 88 Client Security Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces An entry is added or removed dynamically to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time VLAN identifier and port identifier The rate limit for the number of DHCP messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Filtering rules are implemented as follows Ifthe global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table lf DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but t
540. se you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 1568499540 186766925933394677505461 73253 13674890836547254 15020245593 1 9986854435836 165 199992332978 1766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801 72627257 141342876294 1301196195566782 595664 10486957427888 146206 5194174677298486546861 57177393901 647793559423035774130980227370877945452 4083971752646358058176716709574804776117 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 24 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must 3 61 Configuring the Switch be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 54 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example 1024 35 13410816856098939210409449201554253476316419218729589211431 73880 055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996 9631 78136627741 4168985132049 11720483033925432410163799759237144901193800 609025394840848271 7819437228840253311595213486102290297898272 13532671316 2943253281 8915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Paramet
541. separate power source This capability gives network administrators centralized power control for devices such as IP phones and wireless access points which translates into greater network availability A maximum PoE power budget for the switch power available to all switch ports can be defined so that power can be centrally managed preventing overload conditions at the power source If the power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to limit the supplied power In the example below the power mainpower maximum allocation CLI command is used to set the PoE power budget for the switch Range 37 180 watts If devices connected to the switch require more power than the switch budget the port power priority settings are used to control the supplied power See Setting a Switch Power Budget on page 33 129 for details Console config power mainpower maximum allocation 180 4 160 Console config PoE is enabled for all ports by default Power can be disabled for a port by using the no form of the power inline CLI command as shown in the example below Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 135 Console config if no power inline 4 162 Console config if 2 10 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent Using a Web browser you can configure the switch and
542. siders this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 114 Port Configuration Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Interface Port 2 x Trunk ID 1 LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority j 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds _ Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted _F Oper State Defaulted j Admin State Distributing _ Oper State Distributing _ AA Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting 2 Admin Stat ETEN Vpro synchronisation i Admin State Aggregation 2 Oper State Aggregation a Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity v Figure 3 60 Displaying Local LACP Port Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 154 Port Channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 3 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 1
543. signed to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 3 40 and Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 3 44 Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Engine ID The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user See Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 3 44 Remote IP The Internet address of the remote device where the user resides e Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 e Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model Auth
544. snooping configuration settings PE 4 121 snooping show ip dhcp Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE 4 122 snooping binding ip dhcp snooping This command enables DHCP snooping globally Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping Default Setting Disabled 4 115 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command and enabled on a VLAN interface by the ip dhcp snooping vlan command page 4 117 DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface as specified by the no ip dhcp snooping trust command page 4 118 from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped When enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Table entries are only learned for untrusted interfaces Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled the rate limit for the number of DHCP messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped Filtering rules
545. specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to 8 trunks on the switch with up to four ports per trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports e When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard e The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together including ports of different media types All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk 3 105 Configuring the Switch Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage e When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types E i depending on the manufacturer s coniigure implementation However note that the static HS trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel ieee ee compatible A F active e To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure links you add a static trunk via the
546. ss default gateway and subnet mask You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Notes 1 Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN 2 Before you can change the IP address you must first clear the current address with the no form of this command Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 270 ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration 4 269 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment e An default gateway can only be successfully set when a network interface that directl
547. ss map rd_class 2 match any Console config cmap match ip precedence 5 Console config cmap This example creates a class map call rd_class 3 and sets it to match packets marked for VLAN 1 Console config class map rd_class 3 match any Console config cmap match vlan 1 Console config cmap 4 245 4 Command Line Interface policy map This command creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces and enters Policy Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a policy map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no policy map policy map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the policy map command to specify the name of the policy map and then use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches criteria defined in a class map e A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the service policy command page 4 249 e You must create a Class Map page 4 246 before assigning it to a Policy Map Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate
548. ssion you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 Atthe prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty n prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Viy n gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the ES4524M PoE is opene
549. ssword checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Console Specify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply Console Login Timeout 0 300 o secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 600 secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 3 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 o secs 0 Disabled Data Bits sx Parity None gt Speed 9600 z Stop Bits 12 Figure 3 1 Configuring the Console Port 1 CLI only 3 26 Basic Configuration CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line console 4 30 Console config line login local 4 30 Console config line password 0 secret 4 31 Console config line timeout login response 0 4 32 Console config line exec timeout 0 4 33 Console config line password thresh 3 4 33 Console config line silent time 60 4 34 Console config line databits 8 4 35 Console config line parity none 4 35 Console config line speed 9600 4 36 Console config line stopbits 1 4 37 Console config line end Console show line console 4 38 Console Configuration Password Threshold 3 ti
550. st 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst instance_id priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp 4 177 4 Command Line Interface name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage
551. st key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits 3 67 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Serer Status I Enabled Version 2 0 SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 f120 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 SSH Serer Key Size 512 896 768 Figure 3 34 SSH Server Settings CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 91 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 92 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 93 Console config ip ssh server key size 512 4 93 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 96 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console tshow ssh 4 96 Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console disconnect 0 4 37 Console 3 68 User Authentication Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication Network switches can provide open and easy access to netw
552. stration Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through IGMP snooping or static configuration Field Attributes Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN e Group Port List Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Web Click MVR Group IP Information MVR Group IP Table Group IP 226 1 23 1 Y Group Port List Unit 1 Port1 Unit 1 Port 2 Figure 3 109 MVR Group IP Information CLI This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr members 4 267 MVR Group IP Status Members 228 1 23 1 ACTIVE eth1 1 d Console 3 215 Configuring the Switch Configuring MVR Interfaces Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR source port or receiver port If only one subscriber attached to an interface is receiving multicast services you can enable the immediate leave function Command Usage e A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for multicast filtering e Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within an MVR VLAN M
553. switch i e the power available to all switch ports Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax power mainpower maximum allocation watts watts The power budget for the switch Range 37 180 watts Default Setting 180 watts 4 160 Power over Ethernet Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Setting a maximum power budget for the switch enables power to be centrally managed preventing overload conditions at the power source Ifthe power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to limit the supplied power Example Console config power mainpower maximum allocation 180 Console config Related Commands power inline priority 4 163 power inline compatible This command allows the switch to detect and provide power to powered devices that were designed prior to the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no power inline compatible Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The switch automatically detects attached PoE devices by periodically transmitting test voltages that over the 10 100BASE TX ports When an 802 3af compatible device is plugged into one of these ports the powered device reflects the test voltage back to the switch which may then turn on the power to this device When the power inline compatible comman
554. t Power Status Not present Agent Master Unit ID aE Loader Version 1062 4 Boot ROM Version 10 2 6 Operation Code Version 1 0 0 5 Console 4 21 4 Command Line Interface Frame Size Commands This section describes commands used to configure the Ethernet frame size on the switch Table 4 9 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 22 jumbo frame This command enables support for jumbo frames Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second See the
555. t ethernet 1 2 Enabled 64000 Kbits second Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Hybrid Enabled All frames 1 0 Disabled 1 u 4093 t 1000000 Kbits per second 1000000 Kbits per second NONE NONE NONE 4 135 4 141 4 141 4 145 3 119 Configuring the Switch Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the fist etcetera target port and study the traffic crossing the Source Single source port in a completely unobtrusive manner port s target port Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port e When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port when using MSTP see Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration on page 3 136 Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 24 Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Default Rx Target Port The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port Range 1 24 Web Click Port Mirror Port Conf
556. t overloaded Switches and routers along the path can use class information to prioritize the resources allocated to different traffic classes The manner in which an individual device handles traffic in the DiffServ architecture is called per hop behavior All devices along a path should be configured in a consistent manner to construct a consistent end to end QoS solution 3 194 Quality of Service Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map Otherwise you will not be able to select a Class Map from the Policy Rule Settings screen Configuring Quality of Service Parameters To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic follow these steps 3 Use the Class Map to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic 4 Edit the rules for each class to specify a type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN 5 Use the Policy Map to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled 6 Add one or more classes to the Policy Map Assign policy rules to each class by setting the QoS value to be assigned to the matching traffic class The policy rule can also be configured to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP se
557. t1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch IC 4 99 retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 100 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on a dot1x port IC 4 100 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 101 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports IC 4 102 dot1x timeout quiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max IC 4 102 Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client IC 4 103 must be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an authentication IC 4 103 session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 104 4 98 Authentication Commands 4 dot1x system auth control This command enables IEEE 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dot1x system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx system auth control Console config dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values
558. tch General Configuration Guidelines for MVR 1 Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN and add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 3 212 2 Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver ports see Configuring MVR Interfaces on page 3 216 3 Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 204 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages 4 For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 217 Configuring Global MVR Settings The global settings for Multicast VLAN Registration MVR include enabling or disabling MVR for the switch selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for common multicast streams supported by the service provider and assigning the multicast group address for each of these services to the MVR VLAN Command Attributes MVR Status When MVR is enabled on the switch any multicast data associated with an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group
559. tchport mode private vlan switchport private vlan host association switchport private vlan mapping show vlan private vilan Configuring Protocol based VLANs protocol vlan protocol group protocol vlan protocol group vlan show protocol vlan protocol group show protocol vian protocol group vid LLDP Commands IIdp IIdp holdtime multiplier lldp medFastStartCount IIdp notification interval lldp refresh interval IIdp reinit delay IIdp tx delay Ildp admin status IIdp notification Ildp mednotification IIdp basic tlv management ip address lldp basic tlv port description lldp basic tlv system capabilities IIdp basic tlv system description lldp basic tlv system name lldp doti tlv proto ident lldp dot1 tlv proto vid IIdp dot1 tlv pvid lldp dot1 tlv vian name lldp dot3 tlv link agg IIdp dot3 tlv mac phy lldp dot3 tlv max frame Ildp dot3 tlv poe Ildp medtlv extpoe Ildp medtlv inventory Ildp medtlv location Ildp medtlv med cap Ildp medtlv network policy show Ildp config show Ildp info local device show Ildp info remote device show Ildp info statistics 4 205 4 205 4 206 4 207 4 207 4 208 4 209 4 209 4 210 4 211 4 212 4 214 4 214 4 215 4 215 4 216 4 217 4 217 4 218 4 218 4 219 4 220 4 221 4 221 4 222 4 222 4 223 4 223 4 224 4 224 4 225 4 225 4 226 4 226 4 227 4 227 4 228 4 228 4 229 4 229 4 231 4 232 4 233 Class of Service Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 queue mode switchp
560. te 4 94 show ssh 4 96 ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 33 show ip ssh 4 96 4 92 Authentication Commands 4 ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 96 ip ssh server key size This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip
561. ted Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 254 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 258 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 254 4 259 4 Command Line Interface Static Multicast Routing Commands This section describes commands used to configure static multicast routing on the switch Table 3 11 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter Adds a multicast router port GC 4 260 show ip igmp snooping mrouter Shows multicast router ports PE 4 261 ip igmp snooping vian mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan via
562. tely deletes a member port of a multicast service if IC 4 254 immediate leave aleave packetis received at that port and immediate leave is enabled for the parent VLAN show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4 255 snow mec addresszlaule Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4 256 multicas 4 252 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id static ip address interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 jjp address IP address for multicast group e interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config 4 253 4 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use
563. ter with their local router for multicast services lf there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Glossary 3 Glossary MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host
564. terface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes e Static Address Counts 0 The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses e Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 C Trunk z MAC Address ooo DOKKEN VLAN 1 Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 3 70 Mapping Static Addresses 10 Web Only 3 132 Address Table Settings CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 166 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is f
565. the DHCP server Depending on the selected option frame format this information may specify the circuit which received the request including VLAN and port or the MAC address of the requesting device that is remote device ID If Option 82 is enabled on the switch client information may be included in any relayed request packet DHCP request packets are flooded onto all attached VLANs other than the inbound VLAN under the following situations DHCP snooping is disabled The request packet contains a valid relay agent address field e DHCP reply packets received by the relay agent that is this switch are handled in the following way 1 When the relay agent receives a DHCP reply packet with Option 82 information it first ensures that the packet is destined for it and then removes the Option 82 field from the packet 3 91 Configuring the Switch 2 If the DHCP packet s broadcast flag is on the reply packet is broadcast to all attached VLANs excluding that through which the reply packet was received If the DHCP packet s broadcast flag is off the switch uses the Option 82 information to identify the interface connected to the requesting client and unicasts the reply packet to the client e DHCP reply packets are flooded onto all attached VLANs other than the inbound VLAN under the following situations The reply packet does not contain Option 82 information The reply packet contains a valid relay agent address
566. the PoE controller subsystem in the switch 9 This parameter is not supported for the current hardware 3 127 Configuring the Switch Web Click PoE Power Status Mainpower Status Maximum Available Power 180 watts System Operation Status on Mainpower Consumption 0 watts Thermal Temperature in Celsius Software Version Version 0x0122 Build 0x15 Figure 3 66 Displaying the Global PoE Status CLI This example displays the current power status for the switch Console show power mainpower 4 165 Unit 1 Mainpower Status Maximum Available Power 180 watts System Operation Status on Mainpower Consumption 0 watts Software Version Version 0x0122 Build 0x15 Console 3 128 Power over Ethernet Settings Setting a Switch Power Budget A maximum PoE power budget for the switch power available to all switch ports can be defined so that power can be centrally managed preventing overload conditions at the power source If the power demand from devices connected to the switch exceeds the power budget setting the switch uses port power priority settings to limit the supplied power Command Attributes Power Allocation The power budget for the switch If devices connected to the switch require more power than the switch budget the port power priority settings are used to control the supplied power Range 37 180 watts Default 180 Watts Web Click PoE Power C
567. the no form to reset to the default address Syntax cluster ip pool lt ip address gt no cluster ip pool ip address The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster Members The IP address must start 10 x x x Default Setting 10 254 254 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An internal IP address pool is used to assign IP addresses to Member switches in the cluster Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form 10 x x member ID Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36 Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with addresses in the network IP subnet Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the Commander You cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode Commander mode must first be disabled Example Console config cluster ip pool 10 2 3 4 Console config 4 55 4 Command Line Interface cluster member This command configures a Candidate switch as a cluster Member Use the no form to remove a Member switch from the cluster Syntax cluster member mac address lt mac address gt id lt member id gt no cluster member mac address lt member id gt mac address The MAC address of the Candidate switch member id The ID number to assign to the Member switch Range 1 36 Defau
568. the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 3 no ip igmp snooping version 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 3 IGMP Version 3 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping immediate leave This command immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service if a leave packet is received at that port and immediate leave is enabled for the parent VLAN Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no ip igmp snooping immediate leave Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN 4 254 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Command Usage If immediate leave is not used a multicast router or querier will send a group specific query message when an IGMPv2 v3 group leave message is received The router querier stops forwarding traffic for that group only if no host replies to the query within the specified timeout period Note that the timeout period i
569. the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration 4 13 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration and VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None 4 14 Command Mode System Management Commands Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session 4 Console quit Press E
570. the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration console only Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 33 4 34 System Management Commands 4 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 35 parity This command defines the generation of a parity
571. this group control the power that can be delivered to attached PoE devices through the switch ports The switch s power management enables total switch power and individual port power to be controlled within a configured power budget Port power can be automatically turned on and off for connected devices and a per port power priority can be set so that the switch never exceeds its allocated power budget When a device is connected to a switch port its power requirements are detected by the switch before power is supplied If the power required by a device exceeds the power budget of the port or the whole switch power is not supplied Table 4 11 PoE Commands Command Group Function Mode Page power mainpower Sets the maximum power available to all switch ports GC 4 160 maximum allocation power inline compatible Provides power to pre standard PoE devices GC 4 161 power inline Turns power on and off for specific ports IC 4 162 power inline Sets the maximum power available to specific switch ports IC 4 163 maximum allocation power inline priority Sets the priority for power supplied to specific ports IC 4 163 show power inline status Displays the current status of power management on specific PE 4 164 ports or all ports show power mainpower Displays the current status of power management for switch PE 4 165 power mainpower maximum allocation This command defines a power budget for the
572. this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the
573. ticast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 1 gt Multicast Router List Unit Port 1 Static Figure 3 103 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 261 VLAN M cast Router Port Type al Eth 1 11 Static Console 3 207 Configuring the Switch Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the app
574. ting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1 Gbps full duplex operation e 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation e 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 4 136 Interface Commands 4 Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Auto negotiation should always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE T port or trunk If not used the success of the link process cannot be guaranteed To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation co
575. tion LACP Port Neighbors Information Interface Port 2 Trunk ID 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32789 Port Oper Priority Ein Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted 2 Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing 2 Oper State Distributing 2 Admin State Collecting 2 Oper State Collecting a Erevana 2 Oper State Synchronization eg Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation 4 Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity 2 Figure 3 61 3 116 Displaying Remote LACP Port Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote s Port Configuration ide of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors Port channel 1 neighbors Partner Partner Partner Partner Admin System ID Oper System ID Admin Port Number Oper Port Number Port Admin Priority Port Oper Priority Admin Key Oper Key Admin State Oper State 4 154 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 32768 00 01 F4 77 6D E0 3 1 32768 32768 0 1 defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout
576. tion CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 191 Max Support VLAN Numbers 256 Max Support VLAN ID 4094 Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No Traffic Classes Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Configuring the Switch Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4094 By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address e IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configurati
577. tions low high or critical Default low Power Allocation Sets the power budget for the port Range 3000 15400 milliwatts Default 15400 milliwatts Web Click PoE Power Port Configuration Enable PoE power on selected ports set the priority and the power budget and then click Apply Power Port Configuration Power Allocation 3000 15400 milliwatts Admin Status Priority M Enabled low M Enabled critical gt I Enabled low M Enabled fhigh M Enabled high gt Figure 3 69 Configuring Port PoE Power CLI This example sets the PoE power budget for port 1 to 8 watts the priority to high 2 and then enables the power Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if power inline maximum allocation 8000 4 163 Console config if power inline priority 2 4 163 Console config if power inline 4 162 Console config if 3 131 Configuring the Switch Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned in
578. tity Console config if Ildp dot1 tlv proto vid This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise port related VLAN information Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot1 tlv proto vid Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This option advertises the port based and protocol based VLANs configured on this interface see Configuring VLAN Interfaces on page 4 196 and Configuring Protocol based VLANs on page 4 208 Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp dot1 tlv proto vid Console config if 4 223 4 Command Line Interface IIdp dot1 tlv pvid This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its default VLAN ID Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot1 tlv pvid Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The port s default VLAN identifier PVID indicates the VLAN with which untagged or priority tagged frames are associated see switchport native vlan on page 4 199 Example Console config interface eth 1 1 Console config if lldp doti1 tlv pvid Console config if IIdp dot1 tlv vian name This command configures an LLDP enabled port to advertise its VLAN name Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax no Ildp dot1 tlv vian name Default Setting Enabled Comman
579. to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c class This command defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act and enters Policy Map Class configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Policy Map configuration mode Syntax no class class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None 4 246 Quality of Service Commands 4 Command Mode Policy Map Configuration Command Usage Use the policy map command to specify a policy map and enter Policy Map configuration mode Then use the class command to enter Policy Map Class configuration mode And finally use the set and police commands to specify the match criteria where the set command classifies the service that an IP packet will receive police command defines the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation e You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that inc
580. to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 135 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 200 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Console config if Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier e Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member 3 165 Configuring the Switch Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pot 3 7f Trunk 7 Query Member Non Member Vlan 1 a Figure 3 81 VLAN Static Membership by Port CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config
581. to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it
582. to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops _ Designated is _ Root Lo ae Ney ee a X A Xo Designated X nest ie sh e N gt _ Designated Port _ a X _ Bridge ae Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP RSTP is designed as a general replacement for
583. tod Authorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Disabled Single Host Force Uneuthonzed I Enable 2 60 soo 30 ves eee 2 Enabled Single Host Force ed S Enbrel 60 fieoo o pinging 3 Disabled Single Host Force Aah Br Ensvielf2 60 i600 30 ares 4 Disabled Single Host Force Authorized I Enable 2 60 3600 30 0 5 Disabled Singie Host aires 60 soo 30 00 00 00 6 Disabled Single Host Force Authorized Enablelf2 50 freon 30 pned a Figure 3 37 802 1X Port Configuration 3 72 User Authentication CLI This example sets the 802 1X parameters on port 2 For a description of the additional fields displayed in this example see show dot1x on page 4 104 Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 2 config if dot1lx config if dot1lx config if dot1lx config if dot1lx config if dot1lx Console config if dot1x Console config if exit Console config exit Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable max req 5 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode 1 1 disabled Single Host 1 2 enabled Single Host 1 23 disabled Single Host 1 24 disabled Single Host 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 1800 quiet period 30 tx period 40 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 5 Status Authorized Operation
584. ton for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 158 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page 3 164 VLAN Configuration Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table vLAN 2 z Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member G O C C 2 c e c O c G 4 C C C Ce 5 za A IL o zl Figure 3 80 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports
585. traffic between community VLANs and other locations Default Setting None Command Mode VLAN Configuration Command Usage e Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same community VLAN and channel traffic passing outside the community through promiscuous ports When using community VLANs they must be mapped to an associated primary VLAN that contains promiscuous ports e Port membership for private VLANs is static Once a port has been assigned to a private VLAN it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP e Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode See switchport mode on page 4 197 Example config vlan database config vlan private vlan 2 primary config vlan private vlan 3 community config Console Console Console Console 4 204 VLAN Commands 4 private vlan association Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary i e community VLAN Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN Syntax private vlan primary vian id association primary vian id add secondary vian id remove secondary vlan id no private vlan primary vian id association e primary vilan id ID of primary VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes e secondary vlan id ID of secondary i e community VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode VLAN Configuration Command Usage Secondary VLANs pro
586. ts to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network e Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolati
587. ty models and levels available and the system default settings 3 37 Configuring the Switch Table 3 1 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels Model Level Group Read View Write View Notify View Security vi noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none none Community string only read only vi noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview none Community string only read write vi noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only v2c noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none none Community string only read only v2c noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview none Community string only read write v2c noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only v3 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined A user name match only v3 AuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms v3 AuthPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms and data privacy using DES 56 bit encryption Note The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system You can then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access Enabling the SNMP Agent Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients
588. ulticast groups can also be statically assigned to a receiver port see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 217 However if a receiver port is statically configured as a member of an MVR VLAN its status will be inactive Also note that VLAN membership for MVR receiver ports cannot be set to trunk mode see Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 166 One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports A source port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined through IGMP snooping or which have been statically assigned see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 3 217 Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port Command Attributes e MVR T
589. ulticast service to that VLAN group Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attribute e Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch Range 1 4094 e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Part List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN 1 224 1 1 12 Unit1 Port Interface Pot VLAN ID 17 lt lt Add Multicast IP emove Port 15 Trunk Figure 3 106 Specifying Multicast Port Membership 3 210 Multicast VLAN Registration CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 253
590. unk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 3 118 Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 120 Rate Limit 3 121 Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each ports 3 121 Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunks 3 121 Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each ports 3 121 Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunks 3 121 Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 122 PoE Power over Ethernet 3 127 Power Status Displays the status of global power parameters 3 127 Power Configuration Configures the power budget for the switch 3 129 Power Port Status Displays the status of port power parameters 3 129 Power Port Configuration Configures port power parameters 3 130 Address Table 3 132 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 3 132 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3 133 Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 135 Spanning Tree 3 136 STA Spanning Tree Algorithm 3 138 Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 138 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP 3 141 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 145 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 145 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 148 Trunk Configuratio
591. unk member Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 5 Port Information only 6 Trunk Information only 3 99 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Admin Oper Speed Duplex Flow Control Status Status Status Status 1000Base TX Enabled Up 100full None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled Up 100full None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10half None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10half None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10half None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10half None Enabled None 1000Base Tx Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10half None Enabled None 1000Base TX Enabled 10haif None Enabled None 1000Base Enabled 10haif None Enabled SFP Proferred SFP Preferred Auto Trunk
592. up A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC Address System MAC address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 9 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 157 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 158 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor interface rx tx both no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Always unit 1 port Port number Range 1 24 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets e both Mirror both received and transmitted packets 4 157 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port
593. uplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1 Gbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames or clear it to auto negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full e Media Type Configures the forced preferred port type to use for the combination ports Ports 23 24 Copper Forced Always uses the built in RJ45 port SFP Forced Always uses the SFP port even if module is not installed SFP Preferred Auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link This is the default e Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 105 3 103 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration p Speed Flow i F Port Name Admin Duplex Control Autonegotiat
594. us This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 99 4 143 4 Command Line Interface Example Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Information of VLAN 1 MAC Address Console Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A5 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000fu11 Broadcast Storm Enabled Broadcast Storm Limit 64 Kbits second Multicast Storm Disabled Multicast Storm Limit 64 Kbits second UnknownUnicast Storm Disabled UnknownUnicast Storm Limit 64 Kbits second Flow Control Disabled LACP Disabled Port Security Disabled Max MAC Count 0 Port Security Action None Media Type None Current Status Link Status Up Port Operation Status Up Operation Speed duplex 100full Flow Control Type None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 00 16 B6 F0 3B EC sho
595. vate VLAN port types Normal The port is not assigned in a private VLAN Host The port is a community port A community port can communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with designated promiscuous port s Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN Primary VLAN Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs If PVLAN type is Promiscuous then specify the associated primary VLAN Community VLAN A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports Set PVLAN Port Type to Host and then specify the associated Community VLAN Trunk The trunk identifier Port Information only Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Set the PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN Assign promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN Assign host ports to a community VLAN After all the ports have been configured click Apply Private VLAN Port Configuration PVLAN Port Type Primary VLAN Community VLAN Trunk Normal Normal Promiscuous Host gt Host gt Normal x Normal Figure 3 87 Private VLAN Port Configuration 3 173 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the switch co
596. ve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console show public key user 4 97 steve RSA 1024 37 1438466849167093683923373032012167500183640716341019379638480555999112 0799099855148348217890199813185258913277124318157123167424790379265273151 7645996445200718867580932892335313126801093139027656216876904516683400280 1644806222735312064108007531932299100088804293556331348668582852529675373 63295264191089500393 rsa key 20061102 DSA Console Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled e Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients e SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds e SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The ho
597. vely Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights for allocated service priorities e Use queue weights 1 15 for queues allocated service time based on WRR Queue weights must be configured in ascendant manner assigning more weight to each higher numbered queue Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues for port 5 Console configure Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 Console config if 4 236 Class of Service Commands 4 Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 238 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0 3 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos1 cosn no queue cos map queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 3 where 3 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendati
598. vide security for group members The associated primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network resources within the primary VLAN e g servers configured with promiscuous ports and to resources outside of the primary VLAN via promiscuous ports Example Console config vlan private vlan 2 association 3 Console config switchport mode private vian Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport mode private vlan host promiscuous no switchport mode private vian e host This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community VLAN e promiscuous This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN as well as with all the ports in the associated secondary VLANs Default Setting Normal VLAN 4 205 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To assign a promiscuous port to a primary VLAN use the switchport private vlan mapping command To assign a host port to a community VLAN use the private vlan host association command Example Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 2 config if switchport mode config if exit config interface ethernet 1 3 config if switchport mode config if private vlan promiscuous private vlan host swit
599. view statistics to monitor network activity The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above Netscape 6 2 or above or Mozilla Firefox 2 0 0 0 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 4 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 2 If you log into the Web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the p
600. w interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 24 port channel channel id Range 1 8 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 144 Interface Commands 4 Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 122 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable Stats Octets Input 22988084 Octets Output 9811449 Unicast Input 23967 Unicast Output 8497 Discard Input 0 Discard Output 0 Error Input 0 Error Output 0 Unknown Protos Input 0 QLen Output 0 Extended Iftable Stats Multi cast Input 178 Multi cast Output 14715 Broadcast Input 607 Broadcast Output 4 Ether like Stats Alignment Errors 0 FCS Errors 0 Single Collision Frames 0 Multiple Collision Frames 0 SQE Test Errors 0 Deferred Transmissions 0 Late Collisions 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Internal Mac Transmit Errors 0 Internal Mac Receive Errors 0 Frames Too Long 0 Carrier Sense Errors 0 Symbol Errors 0 RMON Stats Drop Events 0 Octets 32799533 Packets 47968 Broadcast PKTS 611 Multi cast PKTS 14893 Undersize PKTS 0 Oversize PKTS 0 Fragme
601. w vlan private vlan Shows private VLAN information NE PE 4 207 To configure primary secondary associated groups follow these steps 1 Use the private vlan command to designate one or more community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups 2 Use the private vlan association command to map the community VLAN s to the primary VLAN 3 Use the switchport mode private vian command to configure ports as promiscuous i e having access to all ports in the primary VLAN or host i e having access restricted to community VLAN members and channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports 4 Use the switchport private vian host association command to assign a port to a secondary VLAN 5 Use the switchport private vlan mapping command to assign a port to a primary VLAN 6 Use the show vlan private vlan command to verify your configuration settings 4 203 4 Command Line Interface private vian Use this command to create a primary or community VLAN Use the no form to remove the specified private VLAN Syntax private vian vian id community primary no private vian vian id e vian id ID of private VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes community A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to host members in the same VLAN and to promiscuous ports in the associate primary VLAN e primary A VLAN which can contain one or more community VLANs and serves to channel
602. will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to 3 158 VLAN Configuration these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 164 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network ar ea aaa CETTE TETT Po
603. witch for the DHCP Option 82 information to be inserted into packets e DHCP request packets are flooded onto all attached VLANs other than the inbound VLAN under the following situations DHCP snooping is disabled The request packet contains a valid relay agent address field e DHCP reply packets are flooded onto all attached VLANs other than the inbound management VLAN under the following situations The reply packet does not contain Option 82 information The reply packet contains a valid relay agent address field that is not the address of this switch or a zero relay address e Use the ip dhcp snooping information policy command page 4 121 to specify how to handle DHCP client request packets which already contain Option 82 information Example This example enables the DHCP Snooping Information Option Console config ip dhcp snooping information option Console config 4 120 Client Security Commands 4 Related Commands ip dhcp snooping information policy 4 121 ip dhcp snooping 4 115 ip dhcp snooping information policy This command specifies how to handle client requests which already contain DHCP Option 82 information Syntax ip dhcp snooping information policy drop keep replace e drop Drop the request packet instead of relaying it e keep Retain the Option 82 information in the client request and unicast the packet to the DHCP server e replace Replace the Option 82 inf
604. y connects to the gateway has been configured on the switch Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 271 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command e DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if exit Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console Related Commands ip address 4 268 4 270 IP Interface Commands 4 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console Related Commands show ip redirects
605. y string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw 4 62 Console config snmp server community private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP client version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters see snmp server host on page 44 64 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console Console Console Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman 4 64 config snmp s
606. y to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 4 76 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 055536 1616310517759408386863 1109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 6963178136627741 41689851320491172048303392543241 0163799759237 1449011938 00609025394840848271 781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671 3162943253281 8915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch Authentication One of the following authentication methods is employed Password Authentication for SSH v1 5 or V2 Clients a The client sends its password to the server b The switch compares the client s password to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the connection is allowed Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the
607. ype The following interface types are supported Source An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Note that the source port must be manually configured as a member of the MVR VLAN see Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 164 Receiver A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the MVR VLAN Any port configured as an receiver port will be dynamically added to the MVR VLAN when it forwards an IGMP report or join message from an attached host requesting any of the designated multicast services supported by the MVR VLAN Non MVR An interface that does not participate in the MVR VLAN This is the default type 3 216 Multicast VLAN Registration Immediate Leave Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group This option only applies to an interface configured as an MVR receiver Trunk Shows if port is a trunk member Web Click MVR Port or Trunk Configuration MVR Port Configuration Port MVR Type Immediate Leave Trunk Non MVR z Enabled Non MvR z m Enabled Non MvR z m Enabled Non MvR z m Enabled Non MvR z M Enabled Non MvR z m Enabled Non MVR z M Enabled Non MvR z m Enabled Non MVR m Enabled a Figure 3 110 MVR Port Configuration
608. ze Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 124 Port Configuration Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics interface G Pont 1 gt C Trunk Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Recewed Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadc

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

WIRELESS BBQ THERMOMETER  Samsung SM-G903F Felhasználói kézikönyv  USER`S MANUAL  Samsung 940MW Brugervejledning    Pulvérisateur 500ml  取扱説明書  WHDMI2 manual  PowerSQL User Guide  HeRO Graft IFU - CryoLife, Inc.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file